JP7120420B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. These gaming machines are provided with control means in which a CPU and elements such as a memory storing a control program are mounted. Controls are in place to make this possible. Note that there is also known a configuration in which the CPU and memory are not individually mounted in the control means, but are mounted in the control means in an integrated state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration that enables the control means to suitably execute arithmetic processing, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suitably executing arithmetic processing in a control means.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 is a calculation execution means for starting calculation processing using calculation information when a start opportunity occurs;
a result utilization means for executing a specific process using a calculation result of the calculation process;
with
When a termination condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing in a predetermined execution time and the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, the arithmetic execution means performs the predetermined comprising a re-executing means for resuming the arithmetic processing from the content in the middle of the execution of
When the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing in the predetermined execution time and the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, the result utilization means performs the arithmetic operation in the execution time before the predetermined execution time. A configuration for executing the specific process using the calculation result of the process,
The specific control means having the arithmetic execution means is characterized by comprising means for transmitting re-execution correspondence information when re-execution of the arithmetic processing by the re-execution means is set.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably execute arithmetic processing in the control means.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device; FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the main control device; It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 10 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing master-side command handling processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control pattern table; FIG. 8A to 8C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of commands transmitted from the sound and light side MPU to the display CPU 72; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents indicated by each command data; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command selection processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing performed by display CPU. (a) is a flowchart showing command analysis processing executed by a display CPU; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a command storage buffer; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed by a display CPU; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a reference table; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by a display CPU; 10 is a flowchart showing display-side command handling processing executed by the sound and light MPU; 4 is a time chart showing how pointer information in an execution target table is adjusted in relation to task processing; 4(a) to 4(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a drawing list; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed in VDP; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the color change effect. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of a memory module for executing a color change effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a color palette. 4 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for color change effect executed by a display CPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting processing for color change effect executed in VDP; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing writing processing for color change effect executed in VDP; FIG. (a) to (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining effect production. 4 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for effect production executed by a display CPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting processing for effect production executed in VDP; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing writing processing for effect production executed in VDP; FIG. (a) to (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining development effects. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing how the effect image data is used to perform the development effect; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for development effect executed by the display CPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting processing for development effects executed in the VDP; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the simultaneous display effect, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration for executing the simultaneous display effect, and (c) is an effect image for the increase. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining image data for . 4 is a time chart showing how image data for normal effects and image data for simple effects are selectively used as image data for displaying effect images for increase. 4 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for simultaneous display effects executed by a display CPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting processing for simultaneous display effect executed in VDP; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by a display CPU; 4(a) to 4(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a drawing list; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed in VDP; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how drawing data is created along with the execution of drawing processing; (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating loop production|presentation. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining a data structure for executing a loop effect, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination table. It is a time chart which shows a mode that loop production|presentation is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for loop production|presentation performed by display CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing interpolation display period processing executed by a display CPU; 4 is a time chart showing the timing at which derivation of coordinate data by compounding is started for loop effect A character and loop effect B character. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting processing for loop effects executed in VDP; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first start target determination table; 4 is a flowchart showing interpolation display period processing executed by a display CPU; 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of bone model display; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data configuration for bone model display; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining skeleton data, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a coordinate calculation area. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for bone model display effects executed by a display CPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing coordinate calculation processing executed by a display CPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting processing for bone model display effect executed in VDP; FIG. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining a set character group; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining skeleton data of each set unit character; 3A to 3C are explanatory diagrams for comparing data amounts of bone display characters and group unit characters; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining collective bone animation data; 3A and 3B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the action contents of each group unit character; FIG. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of plane shadow display; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data configuration necessary for performing plane shadow display; 4 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for plane shadow display executed by a display CPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting processing for plane shadow display executed in VDP; FIG. 12(a) and 12(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of another form of plane shadow display. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for plane shadow display executed by a display CPU; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of step shadow display; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data configuration necessary for performing step shadow display; 4 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for step shadow display executed by a display CPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting processing for step shadow display executed in VDP; FIG. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the variable display effect, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an area used in executing the variable display effect in the expansion buffer of the VRAM. 4 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for variable display effect executed by the display CPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting processing for variable display effect executed in VDP; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing drawing data creation processing for variable display effect executed in VDP; FIG. 4(a) to 4(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the drawing data of the pattern display portion saved in each saving buffer. FIG. FIG. 10A to FIG. 10E are explanatory diagrams for explaining how drawing data for a variable display effect image is created using the drawing data saved in each saving buffer; 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a distorted background display; FIG. 4A to 4C are explanatory diagrams for explaining image data for displaying a distorted background; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for displaying a distorted background, which is executed by a display CPU; 10 is a flowchart showing setting processing for distorted background display executed in VDP; 4 is a flow chart showing a refraction application process executed in VDP;

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. - 特許庁FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism (not shown) attached below the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail. The game ball shooting mechanism shoots game balls by manually operating a shooting operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14 .

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, etc. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when a ball enters the first working port 33 or when a ball enters the second working port 34, three prize balls are paid out. , when a ball enters the general prize winning port 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. executed.

In addition, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may be the first operation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game ball is also expressed as winning.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. - 特許庁

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the common electric open state, the common electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device. , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the lottery is clearly shown through the display effect on the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

In detail, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display part 37a is narrower than the display surface P of the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁In the special figure display section 37a, a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is reserved up to four, and the number of reservations is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display part 37b.

More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or other display device having a display surface, or a dot matrix display device. may

In the design display device 41, when the fluctuation display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 37a based on the winning to the first operation port 33 or the winning to the second operation port 34, the pattern is displayed according to it A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. That is, when the variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in a game cycle in which the game result is a jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset effective line.

The display contents of the pattern display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIG. 3 is a view showing individual symbols that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41, and FIG. 4 is a view showing the display surface P of the pattern display device 41. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 3(a) to 3(j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of a sub pattern. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, ie upper, middle and lower rows, are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display surface P, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), on the display surface P, three symbols are stopped for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It's like Also, five effective lines are set on the display surface P, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 is completed, a big win moving image is displayed as a normal big win result or a 15R probability variable big win result, which will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are attached. The main pattern corresponds to the "non-specific pattern". When a 15R probability variable jackpot result occurs, a combination of the same specific symbols or a combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Also, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Also, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result to be described later, the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in a state in which a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, A demonstration video is displayed.

The pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner, and is not limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

Also, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33 and 34, the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game round.

Returning to the description of FIG. 2, when a jackpot win is won in a winning lottery based on winning to the first operating port 33 or winning to the second operating port 34, winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible. Switch to open/close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 32 includes a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win prizes when the switch to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. Also, in the opening/closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 having the above configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 that allows almost the entire area of the game area PA to be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 43 is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this and may be made of a synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A display light-emitting portion 44 is provided above the window portion 42 . A pair of left and right speaker units 45 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 that bulge forward are arranged vertically below the window portion 42 . An upper plate 46a which opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a which likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. As shown in FIG. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball shooting mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 46a.

A main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 . In addition, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power source/fire control device. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 has a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main controller 50, the board box housing the main control board 51 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. can be As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box are inseparably connected, and the structure of the connecting part (crimped part) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, and the adhesive layer that is to be adhered by peeling it off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining on the case body is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box is conceivable.

An MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51 . The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 52, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 53. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are incorporated.

As the ROM 53, memory means (that is, non-volatile memory means) is used, which allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data, and does not require external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be implemented as a separate chip, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It is good also as the structure mounted.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power/launch control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52 . The power/emission control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 which will be described later.

A blackout monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power/launch control device 57 . In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is sent to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes processing for power failure. It becomes possible to

Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52 . As a part of the various sensors, detection provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning ball entry part such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the through gate 35 A sensor is included, and the MPU 52 makes a prize winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry section. In addition, the MPU 52 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on the winning of the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, and also executes a reach generation lottery for each game round and a lottery to determine the display duration. do.

Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot generation lottery, the display setting of the special figure display section 37a, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the normal figure display section 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, a winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot generation lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when judging the jackpot type such as the probability variable jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, and a pattern. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the display device 41 fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the special figure display unit 37a and the pattern display device 41 A variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time is used. Furthermore, it is decided to use the general electric role release counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the general electric role 34a of the second operation port 34 is in the electric role open state. These counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter buffer 54a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved storage area 54b as an acquired information storage means when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. stored in

The reserved storage area 54b comprises a reserved area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3, and a fourth reservation area RE4. In addition, each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4.

In the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area RE2 Each numerical value information is stored chronologically in the order of →third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are retained and stored. . It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and at the start of one game round is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加

Random number values for winning a jackpot are stored in the ROM 53 as a success/failure table. As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the low-probability mode and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode are set. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is twenty. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers for winning is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reservation storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are (1) the aspect of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) the first prize after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34.

As a mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is performed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or the winning of the large winning opening is completed. Continue until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is performed twice from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and each opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the large winning opening. This continues until there are 6 of them.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 58 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area every 0.6 seconds. be. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the big winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the large winning opening is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode associated with the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, the number of openings and closings of the large winning opening in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value and may be any value as long as the frequency of winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 increases from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the number of opening limits for one opening is set larger good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening and closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning to the special electric winning device 32 occurs. configuration. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the limited number of openings is set shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low-frequency winning mode, for one opening, It is also possible to set the product of the game ball launch cycle and the number of opening limits to be longer than the opening limit time. Also, even if the shooting interval of the game ball and the opening time of the big winning hole at one time are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which no prize is actually awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32 .

As the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, when compared in a situation where the game ball is continued to be launched in the same manner with respect to the game area, the general electric power of the second operating port 34 A low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the accessory 34a being in the open state per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric role open lottery using the general electric role open counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5 ), but in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric role 34a is in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode. is set for a long time. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is won and the open state of the general electric role item 34a occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time required for the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than in the second operation opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is higher than the first operation opening 33. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 34 is increased. When a prize is awarded to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for making the high frequency support mode more frequent than the low frequency support mode to be in the electric role open state per unit time is not limited to the above. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state. In addition, the time secured after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and the next electric accessory open lottery is performed (for example, based on the winning of the through gate 35 In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time to be executed) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reserved time is more likely to be selected than the low-frequency support mode, or the average reserved time is shorter. may be Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time secured when the next electric accessory open lottery is performed after one electric accessory open lottery is performed (that is, , Shorten one time fluctuation display time in the normal map display unit 38a), shorten the average time of the securing time and increase the winning probability, apply any one condition or any combination of conditions , the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. And, as such a distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, and a 15R probability variable jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the normal jackpot state.

The explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winner/failure lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery results in a big win state winning, and the game shifts to a big win state accordingly. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot state.

The 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery results in a big win state winning, and the game shifts to a big win state accordingly. In other words, the 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the 15R probability variable jackpot state.

In relation to each game state described above, the normal game state refers to a state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the normal jackpot results, and "10 to 14" correspond to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot results. , and "15 to 29" corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is set as the probability variable jackpot result, the aspect of the probability variable jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing the two types of variable probability jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 15R probability variable jackpot result, which is the high frequency winning mode in the opening and closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode, and the opening and closing execution. Although the low-frequency winning mode is the mode, the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, which is the high-frequency support mode, is the lowest in the support mode. As a result, the monotony of the game can be suppressed, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

As a kind of probability variable jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode, and the support mode is maintained as it was before. Different implicit 2R probability variable jackpot outcomes may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probability variable jackpot results is achieved.

Furthermore, as a type of loss result in the win-fail lottery, a special loss result may be included in which transition to the open/close execution mode of the low-frequency prize-winning mode and transition to the win-fail lottery mode and the support mode do not occur after the end. . In the configuration in which both the non-explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result and the special loss result as described above are set, the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. On the other hand, due to the difference in the transition mode of the winning lottery mode, for example, in the normal game state, if one of the non-expressed 2R probability variable jackpot result or the special loss result occurs, it It is possible to allow the player to predict which outcome actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reservation storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁The expected effect is that the symbol display device 41 is equipped with a symbol display device 41 capable of variable display of symbols, and in the game round when the opening/closing execution mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 is the high frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the variable display is a special display. In the resulting game machine, in the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the start of the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41, the player is made to think that the variable display state is likely to result in the special display result. Refers to the display state for

There are two types of expectation effects: the ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the special display result in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

In the ready-to-win display, the patterns of some of the plurality of pattern rows displayed on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 are stopped and displayed, so that a combination of jackpot patterns corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is achieved. A display state is included in which a combination of ready-to-win symbols with which there is a possibility of being established is displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win symbols are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to perform a ready-to-win effect. , a combination of ready-to-win patterns is displayed in a reduced size or not displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P to perform a ready-to-win effect.

Concretely, the ready-to-win display related to the variable display of the symbols, as a step before ending the variable display of the symbols, the high-frequency winning mode is generated on the preset active line in the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach patterns that has the possibility of establishing a combination of jackpot patterns corresponding to the above, and while the reach line is formed, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the final stop pattern row. is to do

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 4 will be described. A reach line is formed by stop-displaying the main symbols having the same number on the lines L1 to L5, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, the symbols are displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. It becomes a reach display by being drawn. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbols having the same number as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of the symbol ends.

In the advance notice display, after the pattern display is started on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41, the patterns are displayed in a variable manner in all of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, or in a part of the pattern rows. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In addition, it also includes a background image in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such an advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the open/close execution mode is entered. In addition, in game rounds that do not shift to the open/close execution mode, the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53 is referenced, and the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. is executed if On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main controller 50 but by the sound emission control device 60 .

The fluctuation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used for determining the variation display time in the special figure display section 37a and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 in the MPU52. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process, which will be described later. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the special figure display unit 37a and at the start of variation in the design by the design display device 41. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

For example, the general electric role item release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric role item 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric role item opening counter C4.

The output side of the MPU 52 is connected with a payout control device 55 and a power supply/launch control device 57 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55, for example, based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding winning ball portion. The payout control device 55 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 50 . A launch permission command is transmitted to the power supply/launch control device 57 based on the operation of the launch operation device 28 . The power/shooting control device 57 drives the game ball shooting mechanism 58 based on the shooting permission command received from the main controller 50 to shoot the game ball toward the game area.

In addition, the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU52, and the display control of these special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is directly performed by the MPU52. In other words, display control of the special figure display section 37a is executed in the MPU 52 at each game round. Moreover, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is to be specified, the MPU 52 controls the display of the general pattern display unit 38a.

The output side of the MPU 52 is connected to a special electric prize driving unit that opens and closes the opening and closing door of the special electric prize winning device 32, and a general electric accessory driving unit that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34. . In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 52 executes the driving control of the special electric winning driving section so that the big winning opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electrical role 34a is won in the open state, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the general electrical role driving unit so that the general electrical role 34a is opened and closed. Further, the output side of the MPU 52 is connected to an audio emission control device 60, and various commands for effects are transmitted to the audio emission control device 60. FIG.

Here, processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described. The processing of the MPU 52 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing. In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. In step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 52 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 57 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, whether or not the power failure flag of the RAM 54 is set to "1". determine whether In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on the occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. At step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the processing of step S108 on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. proceed to In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54 is set to an initial value such as initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in order to recognize the current game state. do.

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113. In other words, although the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter in the RAM 54, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec). First, in step S201, power failure information storage processing is executed. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed.

In subsequent step S202, random number update processing for lottery is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric role release counter C4, and the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information was executed. Afterwards, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In subsequent step S205, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the RAM 54 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to various drive units is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric prize driving unit is set, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set Stop the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information to switch the general electrical role 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electrical role drive unit is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the subsequent step S209, winning detection processing is executed. In the winning detection process, the signal received from each winning detection sensor is read, and whether or not there is a winning to the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 Execute the process to identify the .

In the following step S210, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54. FIG. In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

In the subsequent step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed. In a situation where the shooting operation to the shooting operation device 28 is continued, as already explained, one game ball is shot at a predetermined shooting cycle of 0.6 sec.

In the subsequent step S212, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and open confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed.

In the following step S213, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game round and execution control of the opening and closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 occurs in a situation where the number of reservation information stored in the reservation storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, The numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point is stored as pending information in the pending storage area 54b in chronological order. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, on the condition that the reservation information is not during the game rotation and the opening and closing execution mode and the reservation information is stored, it is determined whether or not the reservation information corresponds to the jackpot winning. processing, and when it corresponds to the winning of the jackpot, a distribution determination processing of deciding which jackpot result the reservation information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control processing, not only the winning judgment processing and the distribution judgment processing, but also if the holding information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, it is determined whether the holding information corresponds to reach occurrence Along with executing a reach determination process to determine, a process of selecting the duration of the game round using the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is executed. In this case, the variation display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, the jackpot type, and the presence or absence of the occurrence of reach is read from the ROM 53, and the read variation display time table and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that timing are used for this time. Determines the duration of game rounds. Then, a variation command including information on the duration of the determined game round and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and the variation display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a. to start. As a result, one game round is started, and the effect for the game round is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. - 特許庁

In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game round during execution of one game round, and if it is the end timing, the display corresponding to the game result is performed. , the process of ending the game round is executed. In this case, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 . Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game cycle corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the process for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At the time of starting, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 . Moreover, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and a close command that indicates that the round game is terminated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when ending the opening and closing execution mode, an ending command indicating that fact is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and a success or failure lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode and a support mode are set. Execute the process.

After performing the special figure special electric control processing of step S213 in timer interrupt processing, the general figure general electric control processing is performed in step S214. In the general map general electric control process, when the prize to the through gate 35 is generated, the processing for acquiring the reservation information on the general map side is executed, and when the reservation information on the general map side is stored Then, open determination is performed for the reservation information, and processing for performing the production for the normal map is performed with the open determination as a trigger. Moreover, based on the result of open determination, the process which opens and closes the universal electrical accessory 34a of the 2nd operation|movement opening 34 is performed.

In the following step S215, based on the processing result of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, while setting the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information pertaining to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure pending display unit 37b , Set the output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number of the reservation information related to the normal map display unit 38a to the normal map reservation display unit 38b. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, along with setting the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a, the display content of the normal figure display unit 38a Set the output information for updating.

In the following step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 55 are confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. Also, in step S217, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In subsequent step S218, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Audio emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

The sound emission control device 60 has a sound emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted, as shown in FIG. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

As the ROM 63, memory means (that is, non-volatile memory means) is used that allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data and does not require external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be implemented as a separate chip, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It is good also as the structure mounted.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main controller 50 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62 , and the display light emitting section 44 and the speaker section 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62 . A display CPU 72 of the display control device 70 is connected to both the input side and the output side of the MPU 62 . That is, the MPU 62 is connected to the display CPU 72 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and commands are exchanged between the MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 by two-way communication. Although the two-way communication is performed by serial communication, it is not limited to this and may be configured to be performed by parallel communication.

By receiving the variation command transmitted from the main controller 50, the MPU 62 recognizes that it is necessary to start the game round effect, and executes the game round effect start processing. Further, by receiving an end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the effect for the game round, and executes the end processing for the effect for the game round. Further, by receiving various commands for the big win performance transmitted from the main controller 50, it recognizes that the big win performance needs to be started or progressed, and executes the big win performance processing.

Note that the MPU 62 receiving a command from the main controller 50 is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving the command from the main controller 50, but also includes the configuration of receiving the command relayed to the relay board.

In the game cycle production start processing, based on both the command for variation and the type command, the variation display time comprehension processing for comprehending the variation display time of the corresponding game cycle, and the reach display comprehension processing for comprehending the presence or absence of the reach display. Then, a jackpot result grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of the jackpot result and a jackpot type grasping process for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs are executed. Further, based on the grasping results in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the symbol type to be finally stopped and displayed on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 in this game cycle is determined. Execute the type recognition process. Then, based on the results of each of the grasping processes, a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a pattern designation command including information on the type of pattern to be displayed in the final stop display are sent to the display control device. 70.

In addition, in the game cycle production start process, in addition to the above grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for determining whether or not to perform notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery for the advance notice display is also executed. Then, if it is determined that the announcement display is generated and won, an announcement command including information on the type of announcement display is transmitted to the display control device 70 .

In addition, in the game round effect start process, the display light emission table for the game round and the sound table for the game round are read from the ROM 63 based on the processing results of the above processes. The display light emission table for game round defines the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 in the course of progress of the corresponding game round. Further, the output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the course of progress of the corresponding game round is defined by the game round sound table.

In the game round effect end processing, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game round are ended. In addition, in the game round effect ending process, an end command including information for ending the game round effect is transmitted to the display control device 70 .

In the jackpot effect processing, based on the received various commands for the jackpot effect, the effects such as the opening, each round, between rounds, and the ending are grasped, and the jackpot effect corresponding to the grasped results is obtained. command to the display control device 70 . Further, based on the grasped result, the display light-emitting table for the jackpot effect and the sound table for the jackpot effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light-emitting mode of the display light-emitting part 44 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker part 45 during the jackpot effect. stipulate.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. .

The display CPU 72 functions as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected via a bus to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 , and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77 . be done. Note that receiving a command from the sound emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving the command from the sound emission control device 60, and includes the configuration of receiving the command relayed to the relay board. be

The display CPU 72 is connected to a work RAM 73, a memory module 74 and a VRAM 75 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60. Give transfer instructions. Also, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and based on the command received from the sound emission control device 60, instructs the pattern display device 41 to output an image signal. The memory module 74, work RAM 73, VRAM 75 and VDP 76 will be described below.

The memory module 74 prestores control data including control programs and fixed value data, and includes sprite data such as patterns and characters to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, background data, moving image data, and the like. This is storage means for pre-storing various image data. The memory module 74 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require power supply from the outside to retain data. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writeable read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. there is The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in which the still image data is compressed. Moving image data will be described later in detail.

The work RAM 73 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read from the memory module 74 and transferred, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing data, and more specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74 . Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 75 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the pattern display device 41 . The VRAM 75 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires power supply from the outside for storing data, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 75 has an expansion buffer 81 , and image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74 . The VRAM 75 is also provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76 . Note that the VRAM 75 may be incorporated in the VDP 76 .

The VDP 76 is an image generation device that draws data on the pattern display device 41 based on drawing instructions from the display CPU 72, using data stored in the expansion buffer 81, specifically by processing the data. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated in the pattern display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 41a. Since the VDP 76 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control section 91 , a register 92 , a video decoder 93 and a display circuit 94 . These circuits are interconnected via a bus, and are also connected to the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72 and the I/F 96 for the VRAM 75 .

The VDP 76 causes the register 92 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 . By storing the drawing list in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. It should be noted that all of the control programs for the operation of the control unit 91 may be provided by the drawing list. may be configured such that the control unit 91 executes a predetermined process. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 74 in advance.

As the above processing, the control unit 91 reads the image data stored in the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 . Also, the control unit 91 uses (or processes) the image data read out to the expansion buffer 81 to create drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 . Drawing data for one frame is data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame region 82a and a second frame region 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full-color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each color of RGB in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system, and for example, in a configuration in which each dot can display only 256 colors, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 82 is provided with the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b, drawing data created in one of the frame areas is used to perform drawing on the pattern display device 41. , creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame regions is executed. That is, the frame buffer 82 employs a double buffer system.

In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b. It is output to the pattern display device 41 through the connected output port 78 . Specifically, drawing data is transferred to the display circuit 94 from the frame regions 82a and 82b to be output. The transferred drawing data is adjusted in resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 41 and converted into gradation data. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the pattern display device 41 is generated and output. The display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal. The video decoder 93 also decodes the video data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 .

<Processing configuration of MPU 62 of sound emission control device 60>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 62 of the sound emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound and light side MPU 62) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed in the sound and light side MPU 62 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec).

First, in step S301, master-side command processing for performing processing corresponding to a command received from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 (hereinafter referred to as the master-side MPU 52) is executed. In subsequent step S302, a command selection process for instructing the display CPU 72 about the content of the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed.

After that, in step S303, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the display light emitting section 44 is performed according to the control pattern table read out in the master side command handling process of step S301. Further, in step S304, sound output control processing for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed according to the control pattern table read out in the master side command handling process of step S301. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed in step S305. In the pointer update process, the current pointer information in the control pattern table is updated to the next pointer information. Further, in step S306, a display-side command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the display CPU 72 is executed.

<Main-side command response processing>
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the master-side command handling process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

If the command for variation and the type command have been received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), a game result storage process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information contained in the type command, the information indicating the result of the win/fail lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main side MPU 52 at the start of the current game cycle is specified, and the The specified information is written in RAM 64 .

In the subsequent step S403, the advance notice lottery process is executed. In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the symbol display device 41 is to perform the advance notice display in the current game round. As described above, such an advance notice display may be performed in a situation in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner after the symbol display device 41 starts to variably display the symbols, or in some cases. In a situation in which symbols are displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, the characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the background screen is changed from the previous aspect. Also includes those in which the patterns on the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are different from the patterns up to that point. The notice display can occur in any game round when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed, but the rate when the reach display is performed is higher than when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice display is more likely to occur in the game rounds corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game rounds corresponding to the result of losing, and the advance notice display with a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. A preliminary lottery will be held.

In the following step S404, stop symbol determination processing is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game cycle is either the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result, it corresponds to the stop result that the same pattern combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5. This information is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the same odd symbol combination is selected for the 15R probability variable jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination can be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variable jackpot result. The active lines L1 to L5 on which the same combination of symbols are stop-displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, even if the result is a normal jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols may be selected.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game cycle is the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbol is not established on all the activated lines L1 to L5, and the activated line L1 Information corresponding to a stop result in which a specific combination of symbols (“3, 4, 1”) is established on L5 is determined as the current stop result information. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a loss result, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win display is specified from the content of the variation command. Then, when the ready-to-win display occurs, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols does not hold on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and on one or two of the effective lines L1 to L5 Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of ready-to-win symbols is established is determined as information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if the ready-to-win display does not occur, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols does not hold on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the ready-to-win display is on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as information of the current stop result.

In the subsequent step S405, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the duration of the game cycle is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the information on the duration, the information on the game result specified in step S402, and the advance notice in step S403 are transmitted. An effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the lottery process and the stop result information determined in step S404 is selected. When selecting the effect pattern, the pattern determination table provided in the ROM 63 is referred to, and the information on the current duration, the information on the game result, the information on the lottery result of the advance notice lottery process, and the information on the stop result. The address in the ROM 63 of the control pattern table corresponding to the information is specified, and the control pattern table is read out from the ROM 63 and written in the RAM 64 based on the result of specifying the address.

The control pattern table will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. In addition, FIG. 11 is an example of a control pattern table that can be selected when a 15R probability variable jackpot results.

As shown in FIG. 11, in the control pattern table, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the duration of the target game round is set. Information on presence/absence of command output and information on additional data are set.

Information about the content of the task is information that is set to perform light emission control and sound output control corresponding to the current game round, and information that does not reflect the information about the content of the task is not set as additional data. As long as, in each frame, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed in a manner corresponding to the information of the content of the task.

Specifically, regarding the control pattern table shown in FIG. 11, data at the start of fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "0", and data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "200". The data at the end of the notice effect is set in the pointer information of "300", the data at the start of the normal reach is set in the pointer information of "400", and the data at the start of the super reach is set in the pointer information of "700". Data is set, data at the start of fixed effect is set in the pointer information of "1000", and data at the end of fluctuation is set in the pointer information of "1400". Each of these pieces of pointer information corresponds to delimitation timings such as the start of the presentation, the switching of the presentation, and the end of the presentation. In addition, data for enabling light emission control and sound output control between break timings is set in pointer information other than these.

The information on the presence/absence of command output is information indicating the presence/absence of command output from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 and the type of the command. By outputting commands to the display CPU 72 according to the control pattern table, it becomes possible to associate the content of the image on the pattern display device 41, the content of light emitted by the display light emitting unit 44, and the content of sound output by the speaker unit 45. . That is, in accordance with the content of the moving image on the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting section 44 performs light production, and the speaker section 45 performs sound output production.

Specifically, in the control pattern table shown in FIG. 11, command data is set for pointer information of "0" in which data at the start of fluctuation is set in the contents of the task. Therefore, when the game cycle starts to fluctuate, display control is started in the display CPU 72 based on command transmission from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 . In addition, in the contents of the task, each pointer information in which the data at the start of the notice effect, the data at the start of normal reach, the data at the start of super reach, the data at the start of fixed effect, and the data at the end of fluctuation are set, Specifically, command data is set for each pointer information of "200", "400", "700", "1000", and "1400". Therefore, within the range of the effect for the game cycle, which is started by the occurrence of a predetermined start opportunity that the variation command and the type command are transmitted from the main MPU 52, the effect categories included in the effect for the game cycle When the type changes, based on command transmission from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72, the display CPU 72 starts display control corresponding to the new effect division.

The information of the additional data is set as blank as the initial setting of the control pattern table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when there is an instruction to execute notification. When writing to the additional data is performed, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the contents of the task. For example, when additional data corresponding to displaying a predetermined character as an image as notification is set, the image is displayed so that the character image is added to the image corresponding to the content of the task. be.

In addition to the effects for the game cycle, the control pattern table is provided so as to correspond to effects for the opening and closing execution mode, and effects in situations where neither the effects for the game times nor the effects for the opening and closing execution mode are executed. It is Since the control pattern table is set to correspond to various situations in this manner, some control pattern table is read out to the RAM 64 in a situation where operating power is supplied to the sound and light side MPU 62 . there is

Returning to the description of the master side command correspondence processing (FIG. 10), in step S406, it is determined whether or not a notification execution command has been received from the master side MPU 52. FIG. The notification execution command is issued when it is specified that a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for unauthorized use has occurred in the unauthorized detection processing of step S205 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) of the main MPU 52. , and is also output when it is specified that the gaming machine body 12 or the front door frame 14 is open in the input state monitoring process of step S212. Since the notification execution command includes data corresponding to the content of the notification target, the sound and light side MPU 62 can specify the content of the notification target from the received notification execution command.

If the notification execution command has been received (step S406: YES), setting processing for starting notification is executed (step S407). In the notification start setting process, data for executing notification corresponding to the current notification execution command is set as additional data after the current pointer information in the currently set control pattern table. For example, when a notification execution command corresponding to detection of fraud is received, data for performing fraud notification by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is set as additional data. Further, when a notification execution command corresponding to a change in the state of the pachinko machine 10 such as opening the game machine body 12 is received, data for performing the state notification by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is added as additional data. set as As a result, the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 carry out fraud notification or status notification. If the control pattern table to be executed is changed after receiving the notification execution command and before receiving the notification cancellation command, the additional data of the newly changed control pattern table , the notification data having the same contents as those set in the additional data of the immediately preceding control pattern table are set. This makes it possible to continue the execution of the notification.

After that, in step S408, the notification execution command corresponding to the content of the notification execution command received this time is transmitted to the display CPU72. As a result, display control is executed by the display CPU 72 so that the notification image corresponding to the notification execution command is displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

In step S409, it is determined whether or not a notification cancellation command has been received from the main MPU 52. The notification cancellation command is output when it is specified that the state in which a predetermined event has occurred has been canceled in the fraud detection processing of step S205 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) of the main MPU 52. , is also output when it is specified that the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is closed from the open state in the input state monitoring process of step S212.

If the notification cancellation command has been received (step S409: YES), setting processing for notification cancellation is executed (step S410). In the notification cancellation setting process, additional data after the current pointer information in the currently set control pattern table is cleared to "0". As a result, the fraudulent notification or status notification that is being performed by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is cancelled. Thereafter, in step S411, a notification cancellation command is transmitted to the display CPU 72. FIG. As a result, the display of the notification image on the pattern display device 41 ends.

In the master side command handling process, other handling processes are executed in step S412 in addition to the above processes. In other correspondence processing, for example, when a final stop command is received from the main side MPU 52, processing for terminating the effect for the game cycle is executed. Also, when the opening command is received from the main MPU 52, the control pattern table for executing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is read. Execute the processing for ending the production of . Further, in a situation where neither the game round effect nor the opening/closing execution mode effect is being executed, the control pattern table for executing the waiting effect is read.

<Command selection processing>
Next, the command selection process executed in step S302 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described. Before explaining the command selection process, the content of the command transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 will be explained. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the command.

A command transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 has a data structure of multiple bytes. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 12(a) to 12(c), it has first command data CD1, second command data CD2, and third command data CD3. The first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 have the same number of bytes, specifically one byte each. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and each of the command data CD1 to CD3 may be composed of multiple bytes.

In each of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3, the upper two bits function as identification bits, and the remaining six bits function as data bits. Data indicating which of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 is the command data is set in the identification bit. Specifically, the identification bit of the first command data CD1 is set to "01" as shown in FIG. 12(a), and the identification bit of the second command data CD2 is set to "01" as shown in FIG. , and the identification bit of the third command data CD3 is set to "11" as shown in FIG. 12(c).

Data corresponding to the content of the instruction from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 is set in the data bit. The data bits of the first command data CD1 are set with data for causing the display CPU 72 to specify the first type as the general contents of the instruction contents. Specifically, if it is a command to instruct the execution of an effect, the data of the type of effect to be executed in the effect for the game round, the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, and the effect during waiting are set, and the execution of the notification. If the command instructs to, data is set to indicate which of fraud notification and status notification is to be executed.

The data bits of the second command data CD2 are set with data for causing the display CPU 72 to identify the second type included in the first type specified by the first command data CD1. The data bits of the third command data CD3 are set with data for causing the display CPU 72 to specify the third type included in the second type specified by the second command data CD2.

With reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 13, the commands instructing the execution of effects will be taken as an example to explain what contents are instructed by the command data CD1 to CD3.

As already explained, in this pachinko machine 10, an advance notice display can occur as an effect for game rounds. The advance notice is displayed when the symbols are variably displayed in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, or when the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows in some of the symbol rows. It is an effect performed in a situation where the ready-to-win display is performed, and the advance notice display is more likely to occur when the ready-to-win display is performed than when it is not performed. In comparison, advance notice display is more likely to occur. A plurality of types of notice displays are set, and step-up notices and conversation notices are set as part of them.

The step-up notice is an effect that is executed in stages, and the reach display is performed depending on the combination of the number of stages to be executed, the display color of the characters displayed when the effect is executed, and the type of notice character to be displayed. The degree of expectation to be given and the degree of expectation that a jackpot result will occur are suggested. In addition, the conversation notice is an effect in which the first notice character and the second notice character are displayed as if they are having a conversation. And the combination of the types of the first and second notice characters to be displayed suggests the degree of expectation for the ready-to-win display and the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win result.

If the first command data CD1 is "41" in hexadecimal, it corresponds to the step-up notice. In the case of a step-up notice, the second command data CD2 indicates which of the step number, character color, and notice character is to be indicated, and the third command data CD3 indicates the second command data CD2. The specific content of the referent is indicated. In this case, the content instructed by one type of command is only one of the plurality of types of second type content included in the step-up notice. In other words, when executing the step-up notice, it is necessary to instruct the display CPU 72 about the number of stages, the character color, and the type of the notice character. is indicated. Therefore, when instructing the execution of the step-up notice, it is necessary to transmit three types of commands including the command data CD1 to CD3 corresponding to the contents of the second type, specifically three types. The sound and light side MPU 62 transmits a 1-byte end command to the display CPU 72 when the transmission of the three types of commands for instructing the execution of the step-up notice is completed. The end command has a data structure that is not used in other commands. Specifically, it is "FF" in hexadecimal. When the end command is received, the display CPU 72 specifies that the transmission of the command group to be instructed this time has been completed. As a result, even if a plurality of commands consisting of first to third command data CD1 to CD3 are transmitted in order to instruct the execution of the advance notice of the step, the completion of reception of all these commands is displayed. It is possible for the CPU 72 to clearly grasp this.

If the first command data CD1 is "42" in hexadecimal notation, it corresponds to a conversation announcement. In the case of a conversation notice, the second command data CD2 instructs the contents of the conversation, the character color, and which of the first notice character and the second notice character is to be indicated. The specific content of the object indicated by the data CD2 is indicated. In this case, in the case of the conversation advance notice, as in the case of the step-up advance notice, the content indicated by one type of command is only one of the plurality of types of second type content included in the conversation advance notice. In other words, when executing a conversation preview, it is necessary to instruct the display CPU 72 about the content of the conversation, the character color, and the types of the first and second preview characters. Only the contents of the second type of are indicated. Therefore, when instructing the execution of the conversation announcement, it is necessary to transmit four types of commands including each of the command data CD1 to CD3 corresponding to the contents of the second type, specifically four types. When the sound and light side MPU 62 completes the transmission of the four types of commands for instructing execution of the conversation notice, it transmits a 1-byte end command to the display CPU 72 in the same manner as the step-up notice. As a result, even if a plurality of types of commands consisting of first to third command data CD1 to CD3 are transmitted to instruct the execution of the advance notice of conversation, the completion of reception of all these commands is displayed. It is possible for the CPU 72 to clearly grasp this. Also, even if the total number of commands transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 is different between the step-up notice and the conversation notice, the end command is transmitted when transmission of all the commands corresponding to each performance is completed. Thus, the display CPU 72 can clearly recognize that all the commands corresponding to each effect have been received.

It should be noted that, in order to instruct a plurality of types of second type content when instructing execution of other effects, a plurality of types of commands are transmitted when sending a command for instructing execution of a predetermined effect, and these commands are also transmitted. is completed, an end command is sent. In addition, there is an effect in which only one type of content of the second type exists, but when instructing execution of such effect, one type of command including each command data CD1 to CD3 is transmitted and the transmission is completed. Send the end command if Further, the sound/light side MPU 62 finally transmits an end command when transmitting not only a command for instructing execution of effect but also a command for instructing execution of notification. This makes it possible for the display CPU 72 to grasp whether or not the reception of the command from the sound and light side MPU 62 for carrying out the predetermined instruction has been completed, based on whether or not the end command has been received.

When the sound and light side MPU 62 instructs the display CPU 72 about the contents of the advance notice display to be executed in a predetermined period, first to third command data CD1 to CD3 are generated corresponding to the contents of the second stage included in the advance notice display. A plurality of types of commands are transmitted. As a result, even when the number of types in the second stage is increased or decreased, or when the content of the second stage is changed, the command can be changed in units of the corresponding second stage. simplification is achieved.

In addition, by adopting a configuration in which a plurality of types of commands are transmitted in such a one-to-one correspondence with the content of the second type, even if the data of one command is rewritten during transmission due to the influence of noise or the like, , the influence can be confined to the content of the second type.

By adopting a configuration in which the instruction contents are determined step by step by a plurality of command data CD1 to CD3, even if the contents instructed from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 are diversified, the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 Command design is facilitated.

Further, the data used as the second command data CD2 in the command for instructing the execution of the step-up notice is used as it is as the second command data CD2 in the command for instructing the execution of the conversation notice. The data used as the third command data CD3 in the command for instructing the execution of the step-up notice is used as it is as the third command data CD3 in the command for instructing the execution of the conversation notice. The data used as the respective command data CD1 to CD3 are stored in advance in the ROM 63, but as described above, the data used as the second command data CD2 and the data used as the third command data CD3 are Since the configuration is commonly used for a plurality of types of commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required to store command data in the ROM 63 .

The command selection process executed by the sound and light side MPU 62 for transmitting the above command will be described below with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

If the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the control pattern table contains data indicating the transmission timing of the command to the display CPU 72 (step S501: YES), the command at the current transmission timing is determined from the control pattern table. The number of types is read, and a value corresponding to the number of types is set in the command type number counter provided in the RAM 64 (step S502). After that, the address data corresponding to the current value of the command type number counter, which is the address data of the command area of the ROM 63 indicated by the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the control pattern table, is specified. Then, according to the specified address data, the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 are read from the ROM 63 (steps S503 to S505), and the read command data CD1 to CD3 are sent as commands. It is set in a ring buffer provided in the RAM 64 as a target area (step S506). The sound and light side MPU 62 sequentially reads the commands set in the ring buffer and transmits them to the display CPU 72 by transmission interrupt processing that is started periodically (for example, 1 msec) separately from the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9). In this case, the commands set in the ring buffer are transmitted in order of earliest timing.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the command type number counter (step S507), and it is determined whether or not the value of the command type number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S508). If it is not "0", the processing of steps S503 to S506 is executed for the command corresponding to the updated value of the command type number counter. If it is "0", in step S509, the end command is read from the ROM 63 and set in the ring buffer.

<Processing Configuration of Display CPU 72>
Next, processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the V interrupt process which is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle by the display CPU 72, specifically at a cycle of 20 msec.

When the VDP 76 outputs an image signal for one frame to the pattern display device 41, it starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the display surface P, and extends the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output to the dots arranged side by side, and image signals are sequentially output to dots from left to right for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output for the dot at the lower right corner of the display surface P. FIG. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and makes the display CPU 72 recognize that the update of the image for one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal has not been received, if 20 msec has passed since the previous V interrupt process was started, a new V interrupt process is started.

In the V interrupt process, command analysis processing is first executed in step S601. In the command analysis process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16A, in step S701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 62 . When the display CPU 72 receives a strobe signal from the sound and light side MPU 62 , whatever the process being executed at that time is, it starts the command interrupt process with the highest priority, and receives the command received at the input port 77 . , is stored in the command storage buffer 101 provided in the work RAM 73 .

Specifically, the command storage buffer 101 comprises a first unprocessed area 102, a second unprocessed area 103, and a third unprocessed area 104, as shown in FIG. 16(b). Each unprocessed area 102-104 has five command storage areas 102a-102e, 103a-103e, and 104a-104e. Each of the command storage areas 102a-102e, 103a-103e, and 104a-104e can store one type of command consisting of first command data CD1, second command data CD2 and third command data CD3. has a data structure of 3 bytes. In addition, the number of command storage areas 102a-102e, 103a-103e, and 104a-104e provided in each of the unprocessed areas 102-104 is such that the sound and light side MPU 62 executes an instruction to execute an effect or an instruction to execute a notification once. is greater than or equal to the maximum number of types of commands sent when As a result, it becomes possible to store a command group transmitted upon one performance instruction and a command group transmitted upon one notification execution instruction in each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 . In addition, the number of unprocessed areas 102 to 104 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of command groups that can wait in an unprocessed state in the display CPU 72 . As a result, in a configuration in which an unprocessed command group can wait, it is possible to prevent omission of execution of processing corresponding to the command group.

In the command interrupt process, when a new command is received after the end command was previously received, and if an unprocessed command group is not stored in the first unprocessed area 102, the command is stored in the first unprocessed area 102. is stored in the first unprocessed area 102, the command is stored in the second unprocessed area 103, and the unprocessed command group is stored in the second unprocessed area 103. If stored, the command is stored in the third unprocessed area 104 . Each time a command is received, the command storage area of the unprocessed area to be stored is sequentially executed until the end command is received. When the end command is received, the unprocessed area for storing the command is set to the area of the next order. In the command interrupt processing, when the command storage processing is executed, it is possible to identify which of the command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, and 104a to 104e in the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 the command is stored. Make data settings for

Returning to the description of the command analysis process (FIG. 16(a)), in step S701, it is determined whether or not command storage in the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 has newly started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S701, a receiving flag provided in the work RAM 73 is set to "1" in order for the display CPU 72 to specify whether or not the command group is being received. If the process of step S702 has been executed, or if the receiving flag is set to "1" (step S703: YES), it is determined whether or not an end command has been received in step S704. If the end command has been received (step S704: YES), 1 is added to the value of the unprocessed counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S705), and the receiving flag is cleared to "0" (step S706).

Returning to the description of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15), after executing the command analysis processing in step S601, on condition that the value of the unprocessed counter of the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S602: YES), step In S603, the command processing is executed, and in step S604, the value of the unprocessed counter is decremented by one. The command correspondence processing will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, read processing of the command to be processed this time is executed (step S801). Specifically, the command stored in the first unprocessed area 102 in the command storage buffer 101 of the work RAM 73 is written to the area for processing target commands of the work RAM 73 . Note that when the writing is executed, each data in the second unprocessed area 103 is overwritten in the first unprocessed area 102 in the command storage buffer 101, and then each data in the third unprocessed area 104 is transferred to the second unprocessed area. Overwrite the processing area 103 .

Thereafter, a value corresponding to the number of types of commands to be processed this time is set in the processing object counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S802). After that, the reference table corresponding to the first command data CD1 in the command to be processed this time is read from the memory module 74 (step S803). The reference table is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the data contents of the first command data CD1, and specifies the display pattern table for executing the image display corresponding to the command to be processed on the pattern display device 41. Data is set for

The reference table RT when data corresponding to the step-up notice is set in the first command data CD1 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

In the reference table RT, the addresses of the execution target table are set in a one-to-one correspondence with all possible combinations of the third type for all the types of the second type in the step-up notice. For example, when the type of the second type is "step number", the type of the third type is "2", and when the type of the second type is "character color", the type of the third type is "red and the type of the third type is "24th character" in the case where the type of the second type is "notice character", the address of the second stage red 24 table in the reference table RT is the address of the execution target table. set as an address.

The execution target table displays an image of one frame at each update timing of the image when a moving image corresponding to one transmission of the command group from the sound and light side MPU 62 is displayed on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41. It is a group of information that defines the processing necessary to make it possible. In the execution target table, pointer information corresponding to the number of update timings included in the display period of the moving image by the execution target table is set, and the update timing corresponding to the pointer information is set in association with each piece of pointer information. Data is set to enable display of images in

Returning to the description of the command correspondence processing (FIG. 17), after reading the reference table in step S803, among the commands written in the processing target command area of the work RAM 73 in step S801, the current processing target counter value and writes data corresponding to the combination of the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 in the command to the register of the display CPU 72 (step S804). The value of the processing target counter corresponds one-to-one with the command storage areas 102a to 102e of the first unprocessed area 102. In step S804, the processing target is selected from the command storage area corresponding to the current value of the processing target counter. The command written in the command area is used as the data read target.

After executing the processing of step S804, the value of the counter to be processed is decremented by 1 in step S805. Then, in step S806, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter to be processed after the subtraction of 1 is "0". If it is not "0", the process of step S804 is executed for the command corresponding to the updated processing target counter value. If it is "0", the read processing of the execution target table is executed in step S807. In the read processing, the address of the execution target table corresponding to the data read to the register of the display CPU 72 in step S804 is specified from the reference table read out in step S803, and the area of the specified address in the memory module 74 is read. The stored execution object table is read out to the work RAM 73 . As a result, reading of the execution object table corresponding to the command to be processed is completed, and the moving image corresponding to the command to be processed can be displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

By the way, in a situation where display control based on the execution target table for executing effects such as the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the opening and closing execution mode, and the standby effect is executed, the execution for executing fraud notification or status notification When the target table is read, the execution target table for notification is read to the work RAM 73 while the already read performance target table is stored in the work RAM 73 . Then, in the task processing (FIG. 19) to be described later, arithmetic processing is executed to enable the display of images corresponding to both of these execution target tables, and in the pointer update processing (step S607) to be described later, each pointer of these execution target tables is executed. Update information.

Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 15), in the command handling process of step S603, if a new execution target table for fraud notification or status notification is set (step S605: YES), or Alternatively, even if the execution target table for status notification is not newly set (step S605: NO), the operation completion flag provided in the work RAM 73 is set to "1" (step S606: YES ), and in step S607, the pointer updating process is executed and the operation completion flag is cleared to "0". In the pointer update process, the pointer information of the current execution target table is updated to the pointer information corresponding to the next update timing. Note that in step S607 immediately after the execution target table is newly set in the command correspondence processing (step S603), the pointer information update processing is executed so that the pointer information corresponds to the first update timing. The calculation completion flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify whether or not various calculation processes for displaying an image corresponding to one update timing have been completed in the previous execution of the V interrupt process. be.

After executing the processing of step S607, task processing is executed in step S608. In the task processing, in order to display an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time, parameters necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 76 are calculated. Specifically, the parameters are: address information of the area in which the image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 74; address information of the area to which the image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 75; information of the target frame regions 82a and 82b for which data is to be created, coordinate information when writing the control target image data in the target frame regions 82a and 82b, scale information when writing the image data, and It includes uniform α value (semitransparent value) information when writing image data.

Thereafter, drawing list output processing is executed in step S609. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76 . In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped by the immediately preceding task processing becomes the drawing target, and the parameter information updated by the task processing is also set. The VDP 76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in this VDP 76 will be described later in detail.

The task processing in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the delay flag provided in the work RAM 73 is set to "1". In the task processing, as will be described in detail later, various types of arithmetic processing such as arithmetic processing for background, arithmetic processing for effects, and arithmetic processing for symbols are executed. In this case, the period required for execution of various arithmetic processing varies depending on the number of individual images to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, the type of individual images, and the display mode of the individual images. As a result of the fluctuation of the period, the next processing round of the V interrupt processing may be started before the execution of all arithmetic processing in the task processing is completed. In this case, if the execution of the V-interrupt processing is waited, the display CPU 72 cannot quickly respond to command transmission from the sound and light side MPU 62 . Therefore, when it is time to start the next processing round of the V interrupt processing during execution of the task processing, the task processing is not continued as it is, but a new processing round of the V interrupt processing is started. It has become. However, when starting a new processing round of V interrupt processing, the calculation result of the task processing at that time is stored and held, and the calculation is started from the middle of the calculation in the task processing in the V interrupt processing of the new processing round. is restarted, the arithmetic processing for one update timing is not left unexecuted. As a result, for example, in a configuration in which parameter update for displaying a predetermined individual image is controlled by a difference from the previous update value, the parameter update skips once, and subsequent parameter update cannot be performed accurately. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as storage. The in-delay flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify whether or not the execution of various arithmetic processes in the task process is temporarily interrupted and delayed as described above. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data.

If the delay flag is not set to "1" (step S901: NO), setting processing for starting control is executed (step S902). In the control start setting process, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in this processing cycle. If it exists, the work RAM 73 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds to the individual image grasped as the control start target on a one-to-one basis. Allocate a free buffer area so that Further, initialization processing is executed for all the secured empty buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control corresponding to the individual image is set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

In the following step S903, the control update target is grasped. This control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed and which may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing.

After that, in step S904, new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted, and in immediately following step S905, new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited, and then background arithmetic processing is executed (step S906). In the background arithmetic processing, the control update target of this time among the backmost still image and the background sprite that constitute the background image is grasped. In addition, for the grasped control update target, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on a virtual two-dimensional plane, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data designation are calculated and derived. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73 .

After that, in step S907, a new activation of V interrupt processing is permitted, and in step S908 immediately after, new activation of V interrupt processing is prohibited. In the effect arithmetic processing, the control update target of this time is grasped among the effect sprites constituting the image of the effect to be displayed in various effects such as ready-to-win display, advance notice display and jackpot effect. Also, the above various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73 .

Thereafter, a new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S910, and after prohibiting a new activation of the V interrupt process in step S911 immediately after, the symbol calculation process is executed (step S912). In the symbol arithmetic processing, among the symbols to be changed and displayed in each game round, the current control update target is grasped. Also, the above various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73 .

Incidentally, each calculation process in steps S906, S909, and S912 uses animation data set so as to change various parameter information of individual images according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing comes. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. Further, in the symbol arithmetic processing, when an execution object table for fraud notification or status notification is read into the work RAM 73, an arithmetic processing for displaying a notification image corresponding to the execution object table is executed. A notification sprite for displaying the notification image and various parameter information applied to the notification sprite are derived.

After that, in step S913, the operation completion flag provided in the work RAM 73 is set to "1". The calculation completion flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify that the background calculation process in step S906, the effect calculation process in step S909, and the symbol calculation process in step S912 have been executed once each.

After that, in step S914, a drawing instruction target grasping process is executed. In the drawing instruction target grasping process, out of the individual images that have become control update targets by the respective arithmetic processing in steps S906, S909, and S912, the image included in the one-frame image related to the current drawing data creation instruction. Executes processing to grasp the individual images that are included. The grasping is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to the coordinates, rotation angle and scale information of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, the individual images specified in the drawing list are not all the individual images for which control has been started, but only the individual images to be displayed. Moreover, even if the images are not selected, there is no need to uselessly draw the individual images that are not to be displayed. This reduces the processing load on the VDP 76 .

Here, when a new processing cycle of the V interrupt process is started, the new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited. And at each timing before the symbol arithmetic processing of step S912 is executed, a new start of the V interrupt processing is permitted (steps S904, S907 and S910). As a result, if it is time to start a new V interrupt process when step S904, step S907, or step S910 is executed, that is, 20 msec has already passed since the current V interrupt process started. If so, task processing is interrupted at that point, a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started, and the processing of step S601 described above is started. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which the start of a new V-interrupt process waits even though it is time to start a new V-interrupt process.

However, even when a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing is started in this manner, the data corresponding to the processing results up to that point in the current task processing are stored and retained as they are. Further, in this case, address data corresponding to the process executed immediately before the start of a new process cycle of the V interrupt process is written in the interrupt address area 111 provided in the work RAM 73 . By referring to the address data written in the interrupt address area 111 at the start of task processing in the V interrupt processing of the new processing cycle, the execution of the processing is restarted from the timing at which the interruption occurred in the previous task processing. It becomes possible to

Further, when the new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in steps S904, S907 and S910, after prohibiting the new activation in steps S905, S908 and S911, the background calculation process in step S906, A performance calculation process in step S909 and a symbol calculation process in step S912 are executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a new V interrupt process from being started during the execution of various arithmetic processes. If a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started in the middle of execution of various arithmetic processing, it is assumed that the amount of data in the middle of the calculation that should be stored and held will become extremely large. The contents of the address data may become complicated when returning to the state in the middle of the calculation in such a processing cycle. On the other hand, by prohibiting a new activation of V interrupt processing before various arithmetic processing is started, a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is prevented from being started in the middle of various arithmetic processing. becomes possible.

If a new processing cycle of the V interrupt process is started during execution of the task processing, the V interrupt process (FIG. 15) is executed without executing the process of setting the operation completion flag to "1" in step S913. , the processing of step S601 is started. Then, a negative determination is made in step S606 because the calculation completion flag is not set to "1". In this case, the delay flag of the work RAM 73 is set to "1" at step S610.

If the delay flag is set to "1", the subsequent task processing (FIG. 19) makes an affirmative determination in step S901. In this case, after the delay flag is cleared to "0" (step S915), the address data is read from the interrupt address area 111 of the work RAM 73 to start a new V interrupt process in the previous task process. jumps to the process that was being executed immediately before (step S916). As a result, it is possible to restart the execution of the process from the timing at which the previous task process was interrupted.

In the V interrupt process (FIG. 15), if a negative determination is made in step S606, a delay command is further transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 62 (step S611). The delayed command includes pointer information data in the current execution target table. Processing when the delay command is received in the sound and light side MPU 62 is executed in the display side command correspondence processing of step S306 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9).

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, when a delay command is received (step S1001: YES), the pointer information of the execution target table is read from the delay command received this time (step S1002). After that, based on the pointer information of the control pattern table read into the RAM 64 of the sound emission control device 60 and the pointer information read from the delay command, the display CPU 72 responds to the occurrence of a delay in update timing. A pointer range corresponding to the delay is calculated (step S1003).

Since the command output timing to the display CPU 72 is set in the control pattern table, it is possible to derive the pointer information of the timing at which the execution instruction of the effect corresponding to the current execution target table in the display CPU 72 is issued. be. Further, although the cycle of updating the pointer information of the control pattern table in the sound and light side MPU 62 and the cycle of updating the pointer information of the execution target table in the display CPU 72 are different, these cycles are predetermined cycles. becomes approximately constant at . The sound and light side MPU 62 can derive the original pointer information of the execution target table when the task processing is not interrupted in the display CPU 72 from the current pointer information of the control pattern table. Then, from the difference between the derived pointer information and the pointer information grasped from the delay command of the display CPU 72, necessary to match the progress of control in the sound and light side MPU 62 with the progress of control in the display CPU 72. It is possible to derive the subtraction value of the pointer information of the control pattern table.

In step S1004, by subtracting the derived subtraction value from the current pointer information in the control pattern table, the pointer information is adjusted. As a result, even if the display CPU 72 interrupts the task processing and the updating of the pointer information of the execution target table is delayed, the sound and light side MPU 62 can update the pointer information of the control pattern table to the delayed execution. It is possible to correspond to the pointer information of the target table.

How the pointer information of the execution target table is adjusted in relation to task processing will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 21(a) shows the start timing of V interrupt processing, FIG. 21(b) shows the execution period of task processing, FIG. 21(c) shows the update timing of the pointer information of the execution object table, and FIG. 21d) shows the transmission timing of the delay command, and FIG. 21(e) shows the timing when the display CPU 72 receives the notification execution command from the sound and light side MPU 62. FIG. In the following explanation, it is assumed that the pointer information is updated at the timing when the processing cycle of V interrupt processing is newly started. and the pointer information is updated at a timing before task processing is started. The same applies to the output timing of the delay command.

First, a case where an interruption occurs in the middle of task processing and the notification execution command is not received in the middle of the task processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started at the timing of t1. In this case, the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. 21(c). After that, task processing starts at timing t2 as shown in FIG. 21(b), and the task processing ends at timing t3, which is timing prior to the new activation timing (timing t4) of the V interrupt processing. do. In this case, no interruption of task processing occurs.

After that, as shown in FIG. 21(a), a new processing cycle of the V interrupt process is started at the timing t4, and the pointer information of the execution object table is updated as shown in FIG. 21(c). Then, at the timing of t5, task processing is started as shown in FIG. 21(b). However, at the timing of t6 during execution of the task processing, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the V interrupt processing is newly activated. In this case, the currently executed task processing is interrupted as shown in FIG. 21(b), and a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing is started.

At the timing t6, the pointer information of the execution target table is not updated even if a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing is started. As a result, the task processing starts without updating the pointer information in the V interrupt processing of the new processing cycle, so the data corresponding to the pointer information set in the previous processing cycle of the V interrupt processing is used. It is possible to execute the task processing that has been done. Further, at the timing of t6, a delay command is transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the sound and light side MPU 62 as shown in FIG. 21(d). As a result, in a situation where updating of the pointer information in the execution object table of the display CPU 72 is delayed, it is possible to adjust the pointer information of the control pattern table of the sound and light side MPU 62 according to the delay.

Next, a case where task processing is interrupted and a notification execution command is received during the task processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), a new processing cycle of the V interrupt process is started at the timing of t9, and the pointer information of the execution object table is updated as shown in FIG. 21(c). At the timing of t10, task processing is started as shown in FIG. 21(b). However, at the timing of t12 in the middle of execution of the task processing, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the V interrupt processing is newly activated. In this case, the currently executed task processing is interrupted as shown in FIG. 21(b), and a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing is started.

However, the timing t11, which is the timing after the timing t10, which is the start timing of the interrupted task processing, and before the timing t12, which is the start timing of the new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing. At the timing, as shown in FIG. 21(e), notification execution is received from the sound and light side MPU 62. Therefore, even if the task processing is interrupted at the timing of t12 and a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing is started, the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. 21(c). Also, as shown in FIG. 21(d), no delay command is transmitted.

After that, at the timing of t13, task processing is started as shown in FIG. 21(b). In the task processing, regarding various arithmetic processing for effects, since the calculation corresponding to the data for one piece of pointer information is not executed in the execution object table for effects, the setting of various parameter information is performed normally. There is a possibility that the image display for presentation may not be performed smoothly due to the fact that it is not performed. On the other hand, since various arithmetic processing for notification is started in the task processing, it is possible to immediately start displaying an image for notification. After that, the task processing ends at the timing t14, which is the timing before the new activation timing (timing t15) of the V interrupt processing. In this case, no interruption of task processing occurs.

When a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started, new activation of the V interrupt processing is prohibited. A new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted at each timing before the symbol calculation process is executed (steps S904, S907 and S910). As a result, if it is time to start a new V interrupt process when step S904, step S907, or step S910 is executed, that is, 20 msec has already passed since the current V interrupt process started. If so, task processing is interrupted at that point, a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started, and the processing of step S601 described above is started. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which the start of a new V-interrupt process waits even though it is time to start a new V-interrupt process.

However, even when a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing is started in this manner, the data corresponding to the processing results up to that point in the current task processing are stored and retained as they are. Further, in this case, address data corresponding to the process executed immediately before the start of a new process cycle of the V interrupt process is written in the interrupt address area 111 provided in the work RAM 73 . By referring to the address data written in the interrupt address area 111 at the start of task processing in the V interrupt processing of the new processing cycle, the execution of the processing is restarted from the timing at which the interruption occurred in the previous task processing. It becomes possible to

When the new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in steps S904, S907 and S910, after prohibiting the new activation in steps S905, S908 and S911, the background calculation process in step S906, step The calculation processing for effects in S909 and the calculation processing for symbols in step S912 are executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a new V interrupt process from being started during the execution of various arithmetic processes. If a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started in the middle of execution of various arithmetic processing, it is assumed that the amount of data in the middle of the calculation that should be stored and held will become extremely large. The contents of the address data may become complicated when returning to the state in the middle of the calculation in such a processing cycle. On the other hand, by prohibiting a new activation of V interrupt processing before various arithmetic processing is started, a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is prevented from being started in the middle of various arithmetic processing. becomes possible.

When task processing is interrupted in the display CPU 72 and task processing is resumed from the interrupted state in the next V interrupt processing, a delay command is transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the sound and light side MPU 62. In the sound and light side MPU 62, the pointer information of the control pattern table is adjusted corresponding to the delay. As a result, even if the delay occurs, it is possible to synchronize the content of performance execution control in the sound and light side MPU 62 and the content of performance execution control in the display CPU 72 .

By making a negative determination in step S606 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 15) when the task processing is interrupted by the display CPU 72, the pointer information of the execution target table is not updated and the sound and light side MPU 62 is notified. In the configuration in which the delay command is transmitted, even if the task processing is interrupted, if the delay non-occurrence condition is satisfied, the determination processing in step S606 is not executed, so that the pointer of the execution target table No delay command is sent as information is updated. Specifically, when an execution target table for fraud notification or status notification is newly read into the work RAM 73, an affirmative determination is made in step S605, and the determination processing in step S606 is executed. Then, the process of step S607 is executed. As a result, although there is a possibility that the image display for effect cannot be smoothly performed, it is possible to give top priority to the start of the display of the image corresponding to the fraud notification or status notification. In other words, even if the execution object table for notification is newly read into the work RAM 73 in the command correspondence processing, the image for notification will not be displayed unless the pointer update processing of step S607 is executed for the execution object table after that. does not start. On the other hand, if the execution target table for notification is newly read, even if the interruption of the task processing occurred last time, by executing the pointer updating process in step S607, the It is possible to prevent the start of image display from being delayed.

<Basic processing in VDP 76>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

In the VDP 76, processing for setting the value of the register 92 based on the command sent from the display CPU 72, processing for creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 72, Then, a process of outputting an image signal to the pattern display device 41 based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b is executed.

Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) associated with the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72 . Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

The processing for creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to the description of this process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 22A to 22C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, target buffer information indicating in which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b the drawing data corresponding to the one-frame image related to the drawing list is to be drawn is set. It is The header information includes whether or not decoding is specified and information about the address of moving image data to be decoded.

In addition to the above header information, the drawing list contains a plurality of types of image data used to display an image for one frame. Parameter information is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set to be serial numerical information, and the image data information to be used is set in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. Further, parameter information is set in one-to-one correspondence with the information of each image data.

The drawing order is set so that individual images to be displayed so as to be positioned on the back side of the display surface P in the image for one frame are drawn first. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 22(a), the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and then the sprite data B is written. In the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so as to be on the front side in the order of background image→effect image→design.

A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3), . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22(b), the parameter P(1) of the background data includes address information of the area in which the background data is stored in the memory module 74 and the area in which the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75. address information, coordinate information indicating the position on the two-dimensional plane when background data is written, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the two-dimensional plane when background data is written, and initial background data Scale information indicating the magnification when writing in the frame areas 82a and 82b with respect to the size set as the state, and uniform α value information indicating the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when writing background data. and information specifying α data indicating whether or not the α data is applied and to whom it is applied. The types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A as shown in FIG. 22(c).

Coordinate information is not individually set for all pixels forming image data, but one coordinate information is set for one piece of image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. The VDP 76 is capable of recognizing that the specified coordinate information is one pixel at the center of the image data, and arranges the image data so that the one pixel at the center is on the specified coordinates. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the information volume (that is, the data volume) of the coordinate information to be specified for one image data in the display CPU 72 . In addition, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 do not need to be able to recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, so the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the center pixel, and may be a corner pixel such as the upper left or upper right pixel. Since sprite data and still image data are basically defined as rectangular, by using corner pixels as reference pixels, the display CPU 72 and VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

Further, the uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72 . The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is pre-stored in the memory module 74 as image data. The α data can vary the transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting the uniform α value.

By setting the uniform α value and α data as described above, in situations where the transparency of background data and sprite data should be uniformly controlled for all pixels instead of finely controlling each pixel. Since the uniform α value can be applied, the necessary data volume can be reduced, and by applying the α data, it is possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units.

Drawing processing in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the rendering data specified in the already received rendering list has been created. If the creation of drawing data has been completed, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72 . If a new rendering list has been received, then in step S1103 processing for handling the reception is executed.

In the receiving process, from the target buffer information included in the drawing list, it is determined in which frame area 82a or 82b the drawing data for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is to be drawn.

In the subsequent step S1104, a content comprehension process is executed. In the content grasping process, the image data set as the object to be read in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 . In the content grasping process, the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameter information of the image data is grasped. In the writing process, image data to be drawn this time is written into the frame areas 82a and 82b set as creation targets based on the grasping result of the content grasping process in step S1104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1101 that the drawing data indicated by the already received drawing list is being created, the drawing list counter is updated in step S1106. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the next image data in the drawing order. Then, the processing of steps S1104 and S1105 is executed for the switched image data. In other words, by executing the drawing process a plurality of times, the drawing data of the image for one frame designated by one drawing list is created.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to processing only one piece of image data in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of pieces of image data are processed in one drawing process may be employed. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing of , and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each processing of the drawing processing may be employed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102 or after the processing of step S1105 is executed, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the display circuit 94 has completed outputting image signals for one frame. If not completed, the drawing process is terminated. If completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72 in step S1108, and then the drawing process is terminated.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. An image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the pattern display device 41 based on the created drawing data. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing after one frame for the relevant frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit for alternately switching between the frame regions 82a and 82b to be referenced each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. are regulated so that the frame areas 82a and 82b, which are drawing data drawing targets, are not output targets for outputting image signals.

<Configuration for performing color change effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a color change effect will be described.

24(a) to 24(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the color change effect. As shown in FIGS. 24(a-1) to 24(a-3), the color change effect is a moving image in which the character CH1 for color change effect performs a predetermined action during a predetermined period consisting of a plurality of image update timings. When displayed, it is an effect in which the display color of the color change target area CR of the color change effect character CH1 is changed according to the game situation. For example, when a color change effect is executed as an effect for a game round, the degree of expectation for occurrence of ready-to-win display and the degree of expectation for a big win result are suggested to the player by the display color of the color change target area CR. Further, when the color change performance is applied to the slot machine instead of the pachinko machine 10, the color change target area CR may be displayed in a display color corresponding to the type of winning combination won in the internal lottery.

The character CH1 for color change effect is displayed so that the player can recognize that it represents a person having a face, a body, both hands and both legs. A plurality of color change target areas CR are set in the color change effect character CH1. Specifically, the color change target area CR is set in the head portion, both shoulder portions, and body portion of the color change effect character CH1. The display color of the multiple color change target areas CR is set to the same color. For example, when the display color of the color change target area CR is set to blue, the head, shoulders, and body of the color change effect character CH1 are displayed in blue, and the color change target area CR is displayed in blue. is set to red, the head, both shoulders and body of the color change effect character CH1 are displayed in red. In the final stage of the color change effect, as shown in FIG. 24(a-3), the color change effect image EG1 is displayed for the color change effect character CH1. Effect images include an image representing a blast, an image representing water droplets, a light emitting image representing light emitted from a light source, and an aura image representing light emitting around the character. Secondly, it is an image for enhancing the visual effect. As the effect image EG1 for color change effect, an image is displayed in which light rays are emitted from the character CH1 for color change effect.

24(b-1) to 24(b-3) and the base still image data BD1, BD2, and BD3 shown in FIGS. The parts image data PD1, PD2, and PD3 shown in 3) are used. The base still image data BD1 to BD3 are image data for displaying the color change effect character CH1. The parts image data PD1 to PD3 are image data for overwriting the color change target area CR in the color change effect character CH1 based on the base still image data BD1 to BD3, and are used to add the color change effect image EG1. is the image data of After drawing the base still image data BD1 to BD3 shown in FIGS. By drawing the parts image data PD1 to PD3 shown in c-3), as shown in FIG. 24(a-1) to FIG. character CH1 is displayed, and the display color of the color change target area CR is changed according to the situation.

A specific configuration for executing the color change effect will be described below. First, the data configuration for executing the color change effect will be described. FIG. 25(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the memory module 74 for executing the color change effect. As shown in FIG. 25(a), the memory module 74 stores base moving image data BMD for enabling derivation of base still image data BD1 to BD3, first to n-th part image data PD1 to PD3, A color palette data group CP is stored in advance.

The base moving image data BMD is image data that is interframe-compressed so as to have a plurality of differential data based on one frame of still image data and is encoded by MPEG2, for example. When the base moving image data BMD is decoded, it is developed into still image data for a plurality of frames. Specifically, in the base moving image data BMD, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data consists of one frame of I-picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P-picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B-picture data corresponding to the second difference data. and have The I-picture data is data capable of creating one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. P-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data of one frame or a plurality of frames before when decoding. . B-picture data can be bidirectionally predicted by referring to I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames later when decoding. , is data capable of creating still image data for one frame. In the compressed data of the base moving image data BMD, I picture data is set as the first frame data. Also, B picture data is set as the data of the 2nd frame, . . . , m−1th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the m-th frame data. B-picture data is set as the m+1-th, . . . , n-1-th frame data. Also, P picture data is set as the n-th frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of picture data is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary.

The number of base still image data BD1 to BD3 created by developing the base moving image data BMD is all the frames included in the execution period of the color change effect. The base still image data BD1 to BD3 are image data for displaying only the color change effect character CH1, as shown in FIGS. 24(b-1) to 24(b-3). By using all of the base still image data BD1 to BD3, it is possible to display a moving image in which the color change effect character CH1 moves along a predetermined movement path. Further, each pixel of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 is set with 1-byte color information for each of RGB, and an opaque α value is set.

The first to n-th part image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in the same number as the base still image data BD1 to BD3 so as to correspond to the base still image data BD1 to BD3 one-to-one. As shown in FIGS. 24(c-1) to 24(c-3), the first to n-th part image data PD1 to PD3 are the corresponding base still image data BD1 to BD3 in the color change effect character CH1. It is set so that a color change target area CR having the same position, shape and size as the color change target area CR can be displayed. In this case, the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are set so that the plurality of color change target areas CR are displayed at separate positions. The data of the frame region FR that fills in between a plurality of color change target regions CR is set so that it can be handled as one piece of image data. Each pixel in the frame region FR has no color information set, but has a completely transparent α value set. On the other hand, although 1-byte color information is set for each pixel in the color change target area CR, the α value is not set. Therefore, when the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are overwritten on the base still image data BD1 to BD3, an image based on the parts image data PD1 to PD3 is displayed for the color change target area CR, but other areas are displayed. For , images based on the base still image data BD1 to BD3 are displayed as they are.

Among the parts image data PD1 to PD3, the parts image data for a plurality of frames from the frame at the middle timing on the end side of the color change effect to the frame at the end timing, as shown in FIG. 24(c). Data for displaying not only the color change target area CR but also the color change rendering effect image EG1 is set. 1-byte color information is set in each pixel for displaying the effect image EG1 for color change effect, and an α value, which is a semi-transparent value, is set. When the parts image data is overwritten on the base still image data, not only is the color change target area CR overwritten in the color change effect character CH1, but also the color change effect is performed as shown in FIG. 24(a-3). A semi-transparent color change effect image EG1 is displayed around the character CH1. The state in which the effect image EG1 for color change effect is thus displayed continues over a plurality of frames until the end timing frame.

The color palette data group CP includes a plurality of color palettes CP1 and CP2 for specifying display colors to be applied to the color information of the color change target area CR in each of the parts image data PD1 to PD3. The color palettes CP1 and CP2 are table data in which color information is defined in a one-to-one correspondence with all the data that can be set for each pixel of the parts image data PD1 to PD3. , CP2, color information corresponding to the data set in each pixel is derived.

As shown in FIGS. 25(b-1) and 25(b-2), each color palette CP1, CP2 is set with data so that different colors are based. For example, in the case of the color palette CP1 of FIG. 25(b-1), the base tone is red, and in the case of the color palette CP2 of FIG. 25(b-2), the base tone is green. Therefore, when the color palette CP1 of FIG. 25(b-1) is applied, the color change target area CR based on the parts image data PD1 to PD3 is based on red, and the color palette CP1 of FIG. is applied, the color change target area CR based on the parts image data PD1 to PD3 is based on green. Since the color palettes CP1 and CP2 are data in which only the relationship between color information and display colors is defined, the data capacity of one color palette CP1 and CP2 is smaller than the data capacity of one part image data PD1 to PD3. Furthermore, the total data capacity of all color palettes CP1 and CP2 included in the color palette data group CP is smaller than the data capacity of one part image data PD1 to PD3. Furthermore, in a configuration in which three or more types of display colors are set for the color change target area CR, the sum of the total data capacity of the parts image data PD1 to PD3 and the total data capacity of the color palettes CP1 and CP2 is the base It is smaller than the data capacity obtained by doubling the data capacity of the moving picture data BMD. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required for pre-storing the image data, compared to the configuration in which the base moving image data BMD is prepared for each type of display color of the color change target area CR.

A specific processing configuration for executing the color change effect will be described below. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for color change effects executed by the display CPU 72 . Arithmetic processing for color change effect is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S909 in task processing (FIG. 19). Further, the arithmetic processing for the color change effect is started when information about the color change effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is time to start the color change effect (step S1201: YES), each address of the base moving image data BMD and the first to n-th part image data PD1 to PD3 in the memory module 74 is grasped (step S1202 and step S1203). Also, the addresses in the memory module 74 of the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the display colors set in the current execution target table are grasped (step S1204). After that, in step S1205, color change effect start designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the color change effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, or if the process of step S1205 is executed, various addresses corresponding to the current frame number set in the current pointer information in the execution target table are grasped (step S1206). Specifically, when the base moving image data BMD is decoded and the base still image data BD1 to BD3 for a plurality of frames are expanded in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the base still image data corresponding to the current frame number The address of the area where BD1 to BD3 are stored, the address of the area where parts image data PD1 to PD3 corresponding to the current frame number are stored in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, and the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 The address of the area where the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are stored is grasped.

In the subsequent step S1207, various parameter information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and parts image data PD1 to PD3 to be used this time are calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is stored in the work RAM 73 as these base still image data. The information for control is updated by writing to the area secured corresponding to BD1 to BD3 and parts image data PD1 to PD3. Thereafter, in step S1208, the display CPU 72 stores in the register of the display CPU 72 color change effect specification information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the color change effect should be executed.

When the arithmetic processing for the color change effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) contains the base still image data BD1 corresponding to the current frame number. BD3 and the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are set as objects to be drawn, and the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are set as objects to be used. Further, parameter information applied to the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are set in the drawing list, and color change effect designating information is set. When it is time to start the color change effect, color change effect start designation information is set.

Next, the setting process for color change effects and the writing process for color change effects executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The color change effect setting process is executed as part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23), and the color change effect writing process is executed as the drawing process (FIG. 23). is executed as a part of the writing process executed in step S1105. Further, when the color change effect specifying information is set in the drawing list, the color change effect setting process and the color change effect writing process are executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the color change effect specification information is set in association with the image data for effect, the setting processing for color change effect and the writing process for color change effect are performed in the drawing list this time. , is activated when the drawing order of the image data for effect is reached.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing setting processing for color change effect.

If color change effect start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S1301: YES), the base moving image data BMD is stored in the memory module 74 based on the address information set in the drawing list. The address of the area is grasped, and based on the grasped result, the base moving image data BMD is read out from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S1302). Then, the video decoder 93 is used to decode the base video data BMD (step S1303). As a result, all of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 are expanded and stored in the base moving image area provided in the expansion buffer 81. FIG.

Thereafter, in step S1304, the address of the area in which the first to n-th part image data PD1 to PD3 are stored in the memory module 74 is grasped from the address information set in the drawing list, and the grasped result is Based on this, all the first to n-th parts image data PD1 to PD3 are read from the memory module 74 to the parts image area provided in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 . In step S1305, the address of the area where the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are stored is grasped from the address information set in the drawing list. 74, the color palettes CP1 and CP2 are read out to the palette area provided in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1301, or if the process of step S1305 is executed, then in step S1306, the information of the address where the base still image data BD1 to BD3 to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. At the same time, in step S1307, the information of the addresses where the parts image data PD1 to PD3 to be set this time are stored is grasped from the drawing list. Also, in step S1308, the parameter information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the parts image data PD1 to PD3 is grasped from the information set in the drawing list.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing writing processing for color change effect.

First, the base still image data BD1 to BD3 to be drawn this time are drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. This drawing is performed based on the coordinates specified in the drawing list in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1401).

Thereafter, in steps S1402 to S1406, the parts image data PD1 to PD3 to be drawn this time are converted to the base still image data BD1 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn according to the color palettes PD1 and PD2 corresponding to the display colors of this time. ~BD3 overwrites each drawn dot.

Specifically, first, in step S1402, a write processing counter provided in the register 92 is set to a value corresponding to the total number of pixels in the parts image data PD1 to PD3 to be drawn this time. Thereafter, in step S1403, the color information corresponding to the data set in the pixels corresponding to the current value of the write processing counter in the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be drawn this time is changed to correspond to the display color this time. Read from the color palettes PD1 and PD2. In step S1404, the color information read out in step S1403 is overwritten on dots corresponding to the current value of the write processing counter in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b.

Incidentally, when the current pixel corresponds to the color change target region CR or the frame region FR other than the color change effect image EG1, colorless color information is obtained regardless of the color palette PD1 or PD2. is selected and overwritten so that its color information becomes completely transparent. In this case, the color information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 written in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b is maintained without being changed. Further, when the current pixel corresponds to the color change target area CR, the color information based on the current display color is overwritten as opaque. Further, when the current pixel corresponds to the color change rendering effect image EG1, the color information corresponding to the effect image EG1 is overwritten as translucent.

Then, in step S1405, 1 is subtracted from the value of the write processing counter of the register 92, and in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the value of the write processing counter after the subtraction is "0". If it is not "0", the write processing of the pixel corresponding to the value of the write processing counter after the subtraction is executed, and if it is "0", the write processing for this color change effect is terminated as it is. .

As image data for displaying the color change effect character CH1, parts image data PD1 to PD3 are provided separately from the base moving image data BMD, and base still image data obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD. By overwriting the parts image data PD1 to PD3 on BD1 to BD3 and changing the types of the color palettes PD1 and PD2 applied to the parts image data PD1 to PD3, the same base moving image data BMD can be used. It is possible to change the display color of the color change target area CR of the character CH1 for change effect. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required for pre-storing the image data, compared to the configuration in which the base moving image data BMD is prepared for each type of display color of the color change target area CR.

The parts image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the base still image data BD1 to BD3 obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD. This makes it possible to set the display color of the color change target area CR of the color change effect character CH1 to a predetermined color over the entire display period of the image based on the base moving image data BMD.

The display color of the color change target area CR is changed by changing the color palettes PD1 and PD2 applied to the parts image data PD1 to PD3. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required for storing image data, compared to a configuration in which combinations of parts image data PD1 to PD3 are prepared in advance for the number of changeable display colors.

Although color information is set in the base still image data BD1 to BD3 obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD, the α value for complete transparency or translucency is not set. If still image data set with an α value that makes it completely transparent or semi-transparent is compressed as video data, the α value may adversely affect the differential data and degrade the image quality. Since the α value for complete transparency or semi-transparency is not set, it is possible to compress the image data while preventing such image quality deterioration. Similarly, the parts image data PD1 to PD3 in which the completely transparent or translucent α value is set together with the color information are not compressed as moving image data but are prepared as still image data. As a result, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the image quality of the parts image data PD1 to PD3 as well.

Data for displaying the effect image EG1 for the color change effect is set in the parts image data PD3 for a plurality of frames from the frame at the intermediate timing to the frame at the end timing of the end side of the color change effect. Since the data of the color change rendering effect image EG1 is data in which not only color information but also a translucent α value is set, if such data is compressed as the base video data BMD, the α value will adversely affect the differential data. image quality may be degraded. On the other hand, since the data of the effect image EG1 for color change effect is set in the parts image data PD3, which is still image data, the image quality when displaying the effect image EG1 for color change effect is improved. It becomes possible to do.

<Another form of the configuration related to the color change effect>
・The content of the image added by overlapping other image data on multiple still image data created by decoding video data is a partial area of the character displayed by the video data. The configuration is not limited to the configuration of the image, and a configuration in which a character other than the character displayed by the moving image data is added may be used. In this case, moving image display is performed such that the character performs a predetermined action in the moving image data, and moving image display is performed such that the other character performs a predetermined action by the image data added to the still image data of the moving image data. It is good also as a structure performed.

・By superimposing other image data on a plurality of still image data created by decoding moving image data, an image corresponding to the other image data is displayed with respect to the image displayed by the moving image data. In the additional configuration, instead of the configuration in which the content of the added image is changed by providing a plurality of other image data, the same By setting the image data to overlap, the same still image may be added to the moving image display created from the moving image data.

The configuration in which the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are stored as they are as still image data is not limited, and a configuration in which the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are compressed and provided as moving image data may be employed. In this case, when the color change effect is performed, both the base moving image data BMD and the moving image data corresponding to the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are decoded, and the still image data created by decoding the base moving image data BMD. Still image data created by decoding the latter moving image data must be superimposed on and set.

・Decoding the base moving image data BMD is not limited to the configuration in which the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the still image data created by decoding the base moving image data BMD. The number of still image data created by doing this may be greater than the number of parts image data PD1 to PD3. In this case, the same parts image data PD1 to PD3 are applied to each piece of still image data created from the base moving image data BMD at a plurality of predetermined update timings. For example, in a configuration in which the display position, shape, and size of the color change target region CR are changed only once for a plurality of update timings, parts image data PD1 to PD3 may be provided for the number of change timings. . This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts image data PD1 to PD3. Further, the parts image data PD1 to PD3 may be more in number than the still image data created by decoding the base moving image data BMD. In this case, different parts image data PD1 to PD3 can be set for the same still image data created from the base moving image data BMD, and the color change object area can be set while the color change effect character CH1 is kept stationary. It becomes possible to move or transform the CR.

The configuration is limited to only one part image data PD1 to PD3 applied to the still image data created from the base moving image data BMD at each update timing during the period in which the moving image is displayed based on the base moving image data BMD. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which two or more pieces of parts image data are applied at one update timing.

<Configuration for producing effects>
Next, a configuration for effect production will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29(a) to FIG. 29(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect rendering.

As shown in FIG. 29A, the effect image EG2 is superimposed on the effect character CH2 from the front side of the display surface P in a situation where the effect character CH2 is being displayed as a moving image. This is the presentation that will be displayed. Specifically, an image representing smoke is displayed as the effect image EG2.

Character still image data SD is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the effect character CH2. A plurality of character still image data SD are provided so that the effect rendering character CH2 can perform a predetermined action during the execution period of the effect rendering. As shown in FIG. 29(b), the character still image data SD includes data for displaying the effect effect character CH2 as an individual image and an image based on the character still image data SD as a rectangular image. and data of a frame region FR1 set so as to surround the effect production character CH2.

Effect image data ED1 is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the effect image EG2. A plurality of effect image data ED1 are provided so that the effect image EG2 can change in a predetermined manner during the execution period of the effect rendering. As shown in FIG. 29(c), the effect image data ED1 enables the data for displaying the effect image EG2 as an individual image and the image based on the effect image data ED1 to be treated as a rectangular image. For this reason, data of a frame region FR2 set so as to surround the periphery of the effect image EG2 is provided.

The character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 are formed to have the same size and shape at the time of initial setting. In addition, since the pixels forming the effect character CH2 and the effect image EG2 are set with an opaque or translucent α value, they are displayed on the display surface P, but they form the frame regions FR1 and FR2. Since the α value of complete transparency is set for the pixel, it is not displayed on the display surface P.

The frame areas 82a and 82b in which the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 are drawn contain, as already described, a large number of unit areas, and each unit area stores color information. area is set. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(d), each unit area 121 is provided with color information storage areas 121a to 121c of 1 byte corresponding to each color of RGB on a one-to-one basis. , RGB, 256 colors can be set.

The smaller the value of the numerical information stored in each of the color information storage areas 121a to 121c, the darker the final color displayed in RGB, and black is displayed in the case of the minimum value. Also, the larger the value of the numerical information, the brighter the color in RGB is finally displayed, and white is displayed in the case of the maximum value. Note that in a configuration capable of displaying only 256 colors instead of a full-color system, the color information storage areas 121a to 121c need only be 1 byte.

On the other hand, each pixel 122 of the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 is also set with color information consisting of numerical information using a color palette or the like, as shown in FIG. 29(e). Each pixel 122 is provided with color information defining areas 122a to 122c consisting of 1 byte corresponding to each color of RGB on a one-to-one basis, making it possible to display 256 colors for each of RGB.

Note that the color information storage areas 121a to 121c of each unit area 121 are set to 1 byte instead of 3 bytes, and in a configuration capable of displaying only 256 colors, each pixel 122 is The color information defining areas 122a to 122c may also be set in 1 byte.

In each pixel 122, in addition to the color information defining areas 122a to 122c, an α value defining area 122d is set, in which α value information is set. A storage capacity of 1 byte is secured as the α value defining area 122d, but in actuality any numerical value information "0 to 100" in decimal is set. Further, the α value information is numerical value information of "0 to 100", which corresponds to the α value of "0 to 1", and is treated as a value less than 1 when calculating using the α value.

When the color information of each pixel 122 is drawn in the unit area 121 to be drawn, each numerical value information obtained by multiplying the RGB numerical information of each pixel 122 by the α value is used for storing the color information in the unit area 121. It is stored in areas 121a to 121c corresponding to RGB. In this case, when the opaque α value (specifically, “1”) is set, the color information of the pixel 122 is overwritten as it is in the corresponding unit area 121, and the completely transparent α value (specifically, “1”) is set. Specifically, "0") is set, the color information of the pixel 122 is not written to the corresponding unit area 121 .

When 0<α value<1, a predetermined calculation using the α value is performed with the image superimposed on the far side of the display surface P, and the calculation result is applied to the unit area 121. written. When writing a pixel with 0<α value<1 in the character still image data SD into the unit area 121, blend processing is performed with an image superimposed on the back side of the display surface P. FIG. In detail about the blending process, the color information already written in the unit area 121 is "r1, g1, b1", the color information to be written next in the unit area 121 is "r2, g2, b2", and the color information is "r2, g2, b2". If the α value set along with the color information is α1,
R: r1×(1−α1)+r2×α1
G: g1×(1−α1)+g2×α1
B: b1×(1−α1)+b2×α1
becomes.

On the other hand, in the case of the effect image data ED1, 0<α value<1 is set as the translucent α value for all pixels for displaying the effect image EG2. When the pixels are drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b, pixel addition processing for displaying the effect image EG2 is executed for each unit area 121 in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. . In detail about the addition process, the color information already written in the unit area 121 is "r3, g3, b3", and the color information of the effect image EG2 written in the unit area 121 is "r4, g4, b4". , where the α value set in association with the color information is α2,
R: r3+r4×α2
G: g3+g4×α2
B: b3+b4×α2
becomes.

By executing the above addition process, the effect image EG2 corresponding to the effect image data ED1 reflects the color information and the degree of brightness of the effect character CH2 on which the effect image EG2 is superimposed. Is displayed. As already described, the effect image EG2 is an image such as smoke that allows objects on the far side to pass through. On the other hand, by executing the addition process as described above, the effect image EG2 is displayed in a state in which the effect character CH2 is reflected. be preferred.

When the effect image EG2 is applied in this way, addition processing is executed. The information storage areas 121a to 121c have the maximum value, which may result in white display that is not intended by the designer (so-called overexposure). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, effect production is executed while suppressing the occurrence of the overexposure.

A specific processing configuration for executing an effect presentation while suppressing the occurrence of overexposure will be described below. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for effect rendering executed by the display CPU 72 . Arithmetic processing for effect production is executed in the arithmetic processing for production in step S909 in task processing (FIG. 19). Further, the arithmetic processing for effect production is started when information about effect production is set in the currently set execution target table.

First, in step S1501, character data to be displayed is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The character data includes character still image data SD, and the type of character still image data SD corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is grasped as a display object. Incidentally, when the effect rendering is executed, the effect rendering character CH2 is displayed as a moving image over a plurality of frames in a situation where the effect image EG2 is not displayed, as if it were performing a predetermined action, and then displayed as a moving image. Over a plurality of frames, the effect image EG2 is superimposed on the effect character CH2. In the subsequent step S1502, the parameter information of the character still image data SD grasped in step S1501 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is stored in the work RAM 73 in association with the character still image data SD. The information for control is updated by writing to the area.

In the subsequent step S1503, it is determined whether or not the effect image data ED1 should be applied based on the currently set execution target table. If it is necessary to apply the image data for effect ED1, in step S1504, the type of image data for effect ED1 corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is grasped as a display object. In the following step S1505, the parameter information of the effect image data ED1 grasped in step S1504 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is stored in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the effect image data ED1. The information for control is updated by writing. After that, in step S1506, effect generation designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the effect image data ED1 should be used is stored in the register of the display CPU 72. FIG.

In the subsequent step S1507, whether or not it is time to execute partial addition processing, which is processing for suppressing the occurrence of overexposure when applying the effect image data ED1, is determined based on the currently set execution target table. judge. If it is time to execute partial addition processing, partial addition designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that partial addition processing should be executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 in step S1508.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, if a negative determination is made in step S1507, or if the process of step S1508 is executed, the process advances to step S1509. In step S1509, the effect production designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the effect production should be executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72. FIG.

When the arithmetic processing for effect production is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) contains the character still image corresponding to the current frame update timing. The data SD is set as an object to be drawn, and in the period during which the effect image EG2 is to be displayed, the image data for effect ED1 is set as an object to be drawn. Parameter information to be applied to the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 is set in the drawing list. Further, in the drawing list, effect production designation information is set, effect generation designation information is set during the display period of the effect image EG2, and partial addition designation information is set during the execution timing of the partial addition processing. set. It should be noted that, at the start timing of the effect production, the address information where the character still image data SD is stored in the memory module 74 and the address information where the effect image data ED1 are stored are specified in the drawing list. be done.

Next, setting processing for effect presentation and writing processing for effect presentation executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The effect rendering setting process is executed as part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23), and the effect rendering writing process is executed as a step of the drawing process (FIG. 23). It is executed as part of the write processing executed in S1105. Further, when the effect rendering specification information is set in the drawing list, the effect rendering setting process and the effect rendering writing process are executed. Here, in the drawing list, the effect rendering specification information is set in association with the image data for rendering. is activated when the drawing order of the image data is reached.

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing setting processing for effect production.

In step S1601, the address of the area where the character still image data SD to be drawn this time indicated in the drawing list has been read in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is grasped. At the start timing of the effect production, the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 used in the effect production are read from the memory module 74 and written in a predetermined area of the expansion buffer 81. In the subsequent step S1602, parameter information to be applied to the character still image data SD to be drawn this time is grasped.

If effect generation designation information is set in the drawing list (step S1603: YES), in step S1604, effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time indicated in the drawing list is stored in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Grasp the address of the area being read in . After that, in step S1605, the parameter information to be applied to the effect image data ED1 to be rendered this time is grasped.

FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing writing processing for effect production.

First, the character still image data SD to be drawn this time is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. This drawing is performed based on the coordinates specified in the drawing list in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1701).

If effect generation designation information is set in the drawing list (step S1702: YES), processing for applying the effect image data ED1 is executed in steps S1703 to S1712. Specifically, first, in step S1703, a write processing counter provided in the register 92 is set to a value corresponding to the total number of pixels in the effect image data ED1 to be rendered this time. Thereafter, in step S1704, it is determined whether partial addition designation information is set in the drawing list. If the partial addition designation information is set, the setting processing for partial addition shown in steps S1705 to S1708 is executed, and then the addition processing shown in steps S1709 to S1711 is executed. If the partial addition specifying information is not set, addition processing is executed without executing the setting processing for partial addition.

A case of executing addition processing without executing setting processing for partial addition will be described. First, in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time, each color information of RGB set in the pixel corresponding to the current write processing counter value is multiplied by the α value (step S1709). Then, the color information of the integration result is added to each of the RGB color information stored in the dots corresponding to the current write processing counter values in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b (step S1710). After that, the value of the write processing counter is decremented by 1 (step S1711). As a result, the multiplication result of the color information set in the corresponding pixel of the effect image data ED1 and the α value is added as it is to the color information set in the pixel of the character still image data SD. .

A case where the addition process is executed after the setting process for partial addition is executed will be described. In the setting process for partial addition, first, each color information of RGB set to the pixel corresponding to the current value of the writing process counter in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is read (step S1705). Then, each read color information is inverted (step S1706). At the time of this inversion, the read color information is subtracted from the maximum value "255" of the color information for each of RGB. Also, the value resulting from the inversion, that is, the value resulting from subtracting the read color information from "255" is divided by the maximum value of the color information "255" (step S1707). After that, the value of the division result is added to each color information of RGB stored in the dot corresponding to the current write processing counter value in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1708).

In this case, the division result is "1" for the pixels for which "0" is set as the color information in the effect image data ED1. The dot color information does not change. On the other hand, for pixels for which a value of 1 or more is set as color information in the image data for effect ED1, the result of the division is a value of less than 1. In the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, the color information of the dots obtained by accumulating the division result of the value less than 1 becomes a value smaller than the initially set value.

After that, in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time, each color information of RGB set in the pixel corresponding to the current write processing counter value is multiplied by the α value (step S1709). Then, the color information of the integration result is added to each of the RGB color information stored in the dots corresponding to the current write processing counter values in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b (step S1710). After that, in step S1711, the value of the write processing counter is decremented by 1, and in step S1712, it is determined whether or not the value of the write processing counter after the subtraction is "0". If it is not "0", the write processing of the pixel corresponding to the value of the write processing counter after the subtraction is executed, and if it is "0", the write processing for this effect presentation is terminated as it is. .

By executing the setting process for partial addition as described above, the color information of the character still image data SD already drawn in each unit area 121 of the frame regions 82a and 82b is reduced to a small value. As a result, it is possible to reduce the value of the color information of the unit area 121 to which the effect image data ED1 is added before executing the addition process, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

This reduction is performed by accumulating the values obtained by dividing the value resulting from inverting each color information of the effect image data ED1 by the maximum value of the color information. A unit area 121 having greater color information in the applied image data for effect ED1 has more color information reduced (that is, a smaller value is integrated). As a result, in the effect image data ED1, the unit area 121 to which pixels of large color information are applied has a larger amount of preliminary reduction of the color information, and the color information of the unit area 121 having a high possibility of overexposure is emphasized. can be effectively reduced in advance. Therefore, for the unit area 121 in which the possibility of overexposure is low, it is possible to suppress the reduction amount of the color information set by the character still image data SD, and to maintain the display contents of the effect character CH2 as much as possible. becomes possible.

Reduction of the color information according to the content of the color information of the image data for effect ED1 is performed using the image data for effect ED1. As compared with the configuration in which the image data for partial addition different from the image data for effect ED1 is stored in advance in the memory module 74, the data necessary for storing the image data in the memory module 74 can be reduced. It becomes possible to suppress the capacity.

<Another form of configuration related to effect production>
In place of the configuration in which color information is reduced using the image data for effect ED1, data for reduction separate from the image data for effect ED1 is stored in advance in the memory module 74, and the data for reduction is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. The color information may be reduced by applying it to the character still image data SD. In this case, the amount of the reduction data is set so that the portion to which the data corresponding to the relatively bright color information in the effect image data ED1 is applied is smaller than the portion to which the data corresponding to the relatively dark color information is applied. is set to be large, it is possible to reduce the color information in a manner corresponding to the data content of the effect image data ED1, as in the above-described embodiment.

・In the color information set by the character still image data SD, the color information is reduced for portions where color information equal to or greater than a predetermined value in the effect image data ED1 is set, while the character still image data SD is reduced. In the color information set by , a configuration may be adopted in which the color information is not reduced in a portion where color information of a predetermined numerical value or more in the image data for effect ED1 is not set.

In the character still image data SD, the color information is set for the pixels for which the completely transparent α value (specifically, "0") is set in the effect image data ED1. may be configured so that the reduction of is not performed. In this case, even if the effect image data ED1 is subjected to addition processing, it is possible to exclude areas where overexposure does not occur from reduction of color information. becomes possible.

The target for reducing the color information corresponding to the color information of each pixel set in the effect image data ED1 is not limited to only the color information set by the character still image data SD. The color information set by the character still image data SD and the color information set in the effect image data ED1 may be both, and the color information set by the character still image data SD may be reduced. Instead, only the color information set in the effect image data ED1 may be reduced.

The color information set by the character still image data SD may be reduced in correspondence with the color information set by the character still image data SD. A configuration may be adopted in which the color information set in the effect image data ED1 is reduced in correspondence with the information.

<Configuration for developing production>
Next, a configuration for performing development effects will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 33(a) to 33(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the development effect.

In the advanced production, the type of effect image applied changes as the production progresses, and the type of effect image increases so that the overall effect image content becomes more flashy in stages. It is a performance. Specifically, during the first stage effect period in the development effect, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33(b), the second effect image EG4, in which particles move outward from the center, is displayed during the two-stage production period, and during the third-stage production period of the development production, the moving image is displayed. As shown in FIG. 33(c), both the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are superimposed and displayed as a moving image. In addition to the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4, a third effect image EG5 in which a ring of light spreads outward from the center side is displayed as a moving image.

The development effect is executed as an effect for the game cycle, and the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the ready-to-win display or the degree of expectation of the occurrence of the jackpot result increases as the stage progresses to the rear side. That is, when only the first stage is completed, when the second stage is completed after the first stage, when the third stage is completed after the first and second stages, and when the first stage is completed Stages 1 through 3 are followed by stage 4, and each step is set as an execution pattern for the development effect. becomes higher.

In the development production, the display contents of the effect images EG3 to EG5 are changed in a plurality of stages as described above. The number of image data ED2 to ED4 for use is smaller than the number of stages of the development effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33(e), the memory module 74 stores first effect image data ED2 and second effect image data ED3 as image data for executing the development rendering. Effect image data ED4 is stored in advance.

The first effect image data ED2 is image data for displaying only the first effect image EG3 among the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect. A plurality are provided so as to be able to change in the aspect of. The first effect image data ED2 is data for displaying the first effect image EG3 as an individual image, and the first effect image data ED2 is used to enable the image based on the first effect image data ED2 to be treated as a rectangular image. and data of a frame area set to surround the periphery of the effect image EG3. Since the pixels forming the first effect image EG3 are set with a translucent α value (0<α value<1), they are to be displayed on the display surface P, but the pixels forming the frame region are completely transparent. Since the transparent α value is set, it is not displayed on the display surface P.

The image data for the second effect ED3 is image data for displaying only the second effect image EG4 among the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect. A plurality are provided so as to be able to change in the aspect of. The second effect image data ED3 is data for displaying the second effect image EG4 as an individual image, and second effect image data ED3 is used to enable the image based on the second effect image data ED3 to be treated as a rectangular image. and data of a frame area set to surround the effect image EG4. Since the pixels forming the second effect image EG4 are set with a translucent α value (0<α value<1), they are to be displayed on the display surface P, but the pixels forming the frame region are completely transparent. Since the transparent α value is set, it is not displayed on the display surface P.

The composite effect image data ED4 is image data for displaying all of the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect. A plurality of effect images EG5 are provided so that they can change in a predetermined manner. The composite effect image data ED4 is data for displaying the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 as individual images, and the image by the composite effect image data ED4 as a rectangular image. In order to be able to handle it, it is provided with frame area data set so as to surround the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5. Since the pixels forming the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 are set with translucent α values (0<α value<1), they are not objects to be displayed on the display surface P. However, the pixels forming the frame region are not displayed on the display surface P because the α value of complete transparency is set.

Here, only the first effect image data ED2, the second effect image data ED3, and the combined effect image data ED4 are stored in advance as image data for displaying the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the developmental effect. In , there is no image data for effect corresponding to the effect period of the third stage. On the other hand, both the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 are used during the third stage effect period, so that the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are produced. The animation is displayed in a state where both are superimposed.

How the effect image data ED2 to ED4 are used to perform the development effect will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 34(a) shows the usage period of the first effect image data ED2, FIG. 34(b) shows the usage period of the second effect image data ED3, and FIG. 34(c) shows the synthetic effect image data ED4. indicates the period of use of

In the first-stage rendering period that is executed from the timing t1 to the second timing, the first effect image data ED2 is used as shown in FIG. The composite effect image data ED4 is not used. In the second-stage rendering period that is executed from the timing t2 to the third timing, the second effect image data ED3 is used as shown in FIG. The composite effect image data ED4 is not used.

In the third-stage production period that is executed from the timing t3 to the fourth timing, the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. Both of the data ED3 are used, and the composite effect image data ED4 is not used. In the fourth stage presentation period that is executed from timing t4 to timing t4, as shown in FIG. 2 Effect image data ED3 is not used.

A specific processing configuration for executing the development effect will be described below. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for development effects executed by the display CPU 72 . Arithmetic processing for development effects is executed in the computational processing for effects in step S909 in task processing (FIG. 19). The arithmetic processing for the development effect is started when information about the development effect is set in the currently set execution object table.

If it is time to start the development effect (step S1801: YES), each address of the first effect image data ED2, the second effect image data ED3, and the combined effect image data ED4 in the memory module 74 is grasped ( step S1802). Then, in step S1803, the display CPU 72 stores, in the register of the display CPU 72, development effect start designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the development effect should be started.

If it is the first stage rendering period (step S1804: YES), the first effect image data ED2 of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1805). . Further, the parameter information of the first effect image data ED2 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the first effect image data ED2. information is updated (step S1806). After that, in step S1807, the first stage designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that it is the first stage rendering period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72. FIG.

If it is the second-stage presentation period (step S1808: YES), the type of second effect image data ED3 corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1809). . Further, the parameter information of the second effect image data ED3 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the second effect image data ED3. information is updated (step S1810). After that, in step S1811, second stage designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that it is the second stage presentation period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72. FIG.

If it is the third stage effect period (step S1812: YES), based on the currently set execution target table, the type of first effect image data ED2 corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S1813 ), and grasps the second effect image data ED3 of the type corresponding to the current update timing (step S1814). Further, the parameter information of the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is stored in the work RAM 73 as the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED2. The information for control is updated by writing to the area secured in association with the data ED3 (step S1815). After that, in step S1816, third stage designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that it is the third stage rendering period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72. FIG.

If it is not the third-stage production period (step S1812: NO), it means that it is the fourth-stage production period, so the process proceeds to step S1817. In step S1817, based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data for synthesis effect ED4 corresponding to the current update timing is grasped. Further, the parameter information of the image data for synthesis effect ED4 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the image data for synthesis effect ED4, thereby providing control information. is updated (step S1818). After that, in step S1819, the display CPU 72 stores the fourth stage designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that it is the fourth stage rendering period in the register of the display CPU 72 .

When the arithmetic processing for the development effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) contains the effect image data corresponding to the update timing of the current frame. ED2 to ED4 are set as drawing objects. Also, in the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to the effect image data ED2 to ED4 to be drawn is set. In addition, any one of the first stage designation information, the second stage designation information, the third stage designation information and the fourth stage designation information is set in the drawing list corresponding to the current rendering period, and the development rendering is started. In the timing, information for designating the start of development effect is set.

Next, setting processing for the development effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The setting process for development effect is executed as part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23). Further, when any one of the first to fourth stage designation information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for the development effect is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the first to fourth effect designation information are set in association with the image data for effect, the setting processing for the advanced effect is performed by specifying the image data for effect in the current drawing list. is activated when the drawing order of

If the current drawing list has information specifying the start of the development effect (step S1901: YES), the memory module 74 stores each first effect image data ED2 from the address information set in the drawing list. , the address where each second effect image data ED3 is stored, and the address where each composite effect image data ED4 is stored. All of the data ED2 to ED4 are read out to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S1902).

If the current drawing list has the first stage designation information set (step S1903: YES), the current first effect image data ED2 indicated in the drawing list is stored in the VRAM 75 for expansion in step S1904. The address of the area being read in the buffer 81 is grasped. In the subsequent step S1905, parameter information to be applied to the current first effect image data ED2 is grasped.

If the second stage designation information is set in the current rendering list (step S1906: YES), the current second effect image data ED3 shown in the rendering list is stored in the VRAM 75 for expansion in step S1907. The address of the area being read in the buffer 81 is grasped. In the following step S1908, parameter information to be applied to the current second effect image data ED3 is grasped.

If the third stage designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S1909: YES), the current first effect image data ED2 shown in the drawing list is stored in the VRAM 75 for expansion in step S1910. The address of the area read out in the buffer 81 is grasped, and in step S1911, the current second effect image data ED3 indicated in the drawing list is read out in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address of your area. In the following step S1912, parameter information to be applied to the current first effect image data ED2 and second effect image data ED3 is grasped.

If the 1st to 3rd stage designation information is not set in the current drawing list (step S1909: NO), it means that it is the stage 4 rendering period, so the process proceeds to step S1913. In step S1913, the address of the area where the image data ED4 for synthesizing effect of this time shown in the drawing list is read in the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is grasped. In the subsequent step S1914, parameter information to be applied to the current image data for synthesis effect ED4 is grasped.

By executing the setting process for the development effect, the effect image data ED2 to ED4 to be drawn are set to parameter information in the subsequent writing process (step S1105) for the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. Drawn when applied.

In the third-stage production period in which both the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are superimposed and displayed as a moving image, the image data for composite effect in which both the effect images EG3 and EG4 are collectively set is displayed. Instead of being prepared in advance, first effect image data ED2 to be drawn during the first stage performance period and second effect image data ED3 to be drawn during the second stage performance period are used. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required for pre-storing the effect image data. On the other hand, for the fourth-stage production period in which the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 are displayed simultaneously, a synthetic effect in which these effect images EG3 to EG5 are collectively set image data ED4 is prepared in advance. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the effect images EG3 to EG5 are simultaneously displayed using three types of effect image data. In other words, according to the above configuration, it is possible to perform an effect that gradually increases the number of types of effect images EG3 to EG5 while balancing the storage capacity of the memory module 74 and the processing load.

<Another form of composition related to development production>
Effect image data for displaying the third effect image EG5 may be stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, it is possible to individually display the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 in different display periods, and to use one combined effect image data ED4. It is possible to simultaneously display the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5. In addition, in this configuration, it is possible to display any combination of two sets of images among the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5.

<Configuration for Simultaneous Display Production>
Next, a configuration for performing a simultaneous display effect will be described.

The simultaneous display effect is, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 37(a), the timing at which the number of simultaneously displayed effect characters CH3 to CH7 increases in the middle and the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 further increases. , the display of the increase effect image EG6 is started. The increase effect image EG6 is an image in which waves propagate outward from the center. The increase effect image EG6 is displayed so as to change in a predetermined manner in a predetermined period from the timing when the number of the production characters CH3 to CH7 increases simultaneously to the update timing of a plurality of frames.

As image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, normal effect image data ED5 and simple effect image data ED6 are stored in advance in the memory module 74, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. ing. Both the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, but the simple effect image data ED6 is larger than the normal effect image data ED5. The difference is that the number of pixels is small. In addition, since the normal effect image data ED5 has the same number of pixels as the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7, the simple effect image data ED6 is used to display the effect characters CH3 to CH7. It can be said that the number of pixels is smaller than that of the image data of .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 37(c-1) and 37(c-2), the simple effect image data ED6 has half the number of pixels of the normal effect image data ED5. there is Therefore, in order to display the increase effect image EG6 in the same size, when the simple effect image data ED6 is drawn, the scale is larger than when the normal effect image data ED5 is drawn. information must be doubled.

While only one simple effect image data ED6 is provided, the normal effect image data ED5 changes the increase effect image EG6 in a predetermined manner in a predetermined period over update timings of a plurality of frames. Multiple are provided so that it is possible. When the increase effect image EG6 is displayed, the simple effect image data ED6 is used first, and then the multiple normal effect image data ED5 are used, as will be described later in detail. In this case, the increase effect image displayed by the simple effect image data ED6 can be changed in a predetermined manner in a predetermined period over a plurality of frame update timings. With respect to the display mode of EG6, the display mode of the increase effect image EG6 displayed by the normal effect image data ED5 that is used first among the plurality of normal effect image data ED5 has continuity. .

The normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, and an image based on the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 as a rectangular image. and data of a frame area set so as to surround the increase effect image EG6 so that it can be handled. Since the pixels forming the increase effect image EG6 are set with a translucent α value (0<α value<1), they are subject to display on the display surface P, but the pixels forming the frame region Since the alpha value of complete transparency is set, it will not be displayed on the display surface P.

How the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are selectively used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 38(a) shows a minority display period in which the number of simultaneously displayed production characters CH3 to CH7 is small, and FIG. 38(b) shows a period in which the number of simultaneously displayed production characters CH3 to CH7 is large. FIG. 38(c) shows a period in which the simple effect image data ED6 is used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, and FIG. 38(d) shows the increase It shows a period in which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as image data for displaying the effect image EG6.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), the small number display period is from timing t1 to timing t2. During the small number display period, only two characters CH3 and CH4 are displayed on the display surface P as shown in FIG. 38(A).

When the small number display period ends at the timing t2, the large number display period starts as shown in FIG. 38(b). At the timing when the multiple display period is started, the number of production characters CH3 to CH7 displayed on the display surface P increases to five as shown in FIG. is started. In this case, at the timing t2, which is the start timing of the multiple display period, simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 as shown in FIG. 38(c). . As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of image data for displaying the production characters CH3 to CH7 are read at the start timing of the multiple display period, the time required to read the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is shortened. is planned. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the image data reading period at the start timing of the multiple display period, and increase the production characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed at the start timing of the multiple display period and display the increase effect image EG6. It is possible to preferably perform both the start and the start. Further, according to this configuration, it is necessary to read the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 at a timing before the start of the multiple display period. there is no need to set up a program for forwarding in advance.

The state in which the simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 continues over the update timings of a plurality of frames. Thereafter, at timing t3, as shown in FIGS. 38(c) and 38(d), the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 changes from the simple effect image data ED6 to the normal effect image data ED5. can be switched. This makes it possible to improve the image quality of the increase effect image EG6 more than the period in which the simple effect image data ED6 was used. After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 38(b) and 38(d), the multiple display period ends and the display of the increase effect image EG6 using the normal effect image data ED5 ends.

A specific processing configuration for executing the simultaneous display effect will be described below. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for simultaneous display effects executed by the display CPU 72 . Arithmetic processing for simultaneous display effects is executed in the arithmetic processing for effects in step S909 in task processing (FIG. 19). The arithmetic processing for the simultaneous display effect is started when information about the simultaneous display effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is the minority display period (step S2001: YES), it is determined in step S2002 whether or not it is time to start the minority display period. If it is the start timing of the small number display period (step S2002: YES), each address in the memory module 74 of the image data for displaying the production characters CH3 and CH4 to be displayed in the small number display period is grasped (step S2003). ). Then, in step S2004, the register of the display CPU 72 stores small number display start designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the small number display period of the simultaneous display effect should be started.

If a negative determination is made in step S2002 or if the processing in step S2004 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2005). Further, the parameter information of the image data is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the image data, thereby updating the control information (step S2006). . Thereafter, in step S2007, the display CPU 72 stores small number display specification information for making the VDP 76 recognize that it is a small number display period.

If it is the multiple display period (step S2001: NO), it is determined in step S2008 whether or not it is time to start the multiple display period. If it is the start timing of the multiple display period (step S2008: YES), the memory module of the image data for displaying the production characters CH5, CH6, and CH7 whose display is started in the multiple display period and the simple effect image data ED6. Each address in 74 is grasped (step S2009). Then, in step S2010, the register of the display CPU 72 stores the multiple display start designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the multiple display period of the simultaneous display effect should be started.

In the case of the multiple display period and the simple display period (step S2001: NO, step S2011: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is displayed based on the currently set execution target table. grasp (step S2012). In this case, the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed in the multiple display period and the simple effect image data ED6 are grasped. Further, the parameter information of these image data is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in correspondence with these image data in the work RAM 73 to update the control information (step S2013). . Thereafter, in step S2014, the CPU 72 displays simple display designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that it is a simple display period in which the simple effect image data ED6 is used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6. register.

On the other hand, if it is not the simple display period, that is, if it is the normal display period in which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 (step S2011: NO), in step S2015. It is determined whether or not it is time to start the normal display period. If it is the start timing of the normal display period (step S2015: YES), the addresses in the memory module 74 for all of the plurality of normal effect image data ED5 are grasped (step S2016). Then, in step S2017, normal display start designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that the normal display period should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72. FIG.

In the case of the multiple display period and the normal display period (step S2001: NO, step S2011: NO), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is displayed based on the currently set execution target table. grasp (step S2018). In this case, the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed in the multiple display period and the normal effect image data ED5 are grasped. Further, the parameter information of these image data is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in correspondence with these image data in the work RAM 73 to update the information for control (step S2019). . Thereafter, in step S2020, the CPU 72 displays normal display designation information for making the VDP 76 recognize that it is a normal display period in which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6. register.

When the arithmetic processing for simultaneous display effects is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) contains the characters for effects corresponding to the update timing of the current frame. Image data for displaying CH3 to CH7 is set as a drawing target. Further, in the multiple display period, either the simple effect image data ED6 or the normal effect image data ED5 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this case, for the normal effect image data ED6, the type of normal effect image data ED6 corresponding to the relevant update timing is set as a drawing target. Parameter information to be applied to the image data to be drawn is set in the drawing list. In the drawing list, any one of the small number display designation information, the simple display designation information and the normal display designation information is set corresponding to the current rendering period, and the small number display start designation information is set at the start timing of each display period. , multiple display start designation information or normal display start designation information is set.

Next, setting processing for the simultaneous display effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The simultaneous display effect setting process is executed as part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23). Further, when any one of the small number display designation information, the simple display designation information and the normal display designation information is set in the drawing list, the simultaneous display effect setting process is executed. Here, in the drawing list, the small number display designation information, the simple display designation information, and the normal display designation information are set in association with the image data for the effect. Among them, it is activated when the drawing order of the image data for effect comes.

If small number display designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S2101: YES), it is determined in step S2102 whether or not small number display start designation information is further set in the drawing list. If the small number display start designation information is set (step S2102: YES), the effect characters CH3 and CH4 to be displayed in the small number display period in the memory module 74 are selected from the address information set in the drawing list. is grasped, and based on the grasped result, all of these image data are read out from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S2103).

If the small number display designation information is set (step S2101: YES), the area where the current image data indicated in the drawing list is read in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S2104. know the address of In the subsequent step S2105, parameter information to be applied to the current image data is grasped.

If multiple display start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S2106: YES), display is started in the multiple display period in the memory module 74 based on the address information set in the drawing list. The address of the area storing the image data for displaying the performance characters CH5, CH6, CH7 is grasped, and based on the grasping result, all of these image data are read out from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. (Step S2107).

Also, from the address information set in the drawing list this time, the address of the area where the simple effect image data ED6 is stored in the memory module 74 is grasped, and based on the grasped result, the simple effect image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the simple effect image data ED6. The image data ED6 is read out to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S2108). Then, in step S2109, enlargement processing of the read simple effect image data ED6 is executed. In the enlarging process, the number of pixels is increased while interpolating color information for the image data for simple effect ED6, so that the number of pixels becomes the same as that of the image data for normal effect ED5. Effect image data is created and written into the expansion buffer 81 .

Here, the processing time required for the enlargement processing is the time required to read one normal effect image data ED5 from the memory module 74 and the time required to read one simple effect image data ED6 from the memory module 74. The time is shorter than the time difference from the required time. As a result, even if the image data for simple effect ED6 is enlarged, the processing time can be shortened compared to reading the image data for normal effect ED5 at the start timing of the multiple display period. becomes possible.

On the other hand, if the normal display start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S2110: YES), the normal effect image data ED5 is stored in the memory module 74 from the address information set in the drawing list. Based on the obtained address, all the normal effect image data ED5 are read from the memory module 74 to the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S2111).

If simple display designation information or normal display designation information is set in the current drawing list, the current image data indicated in the drawing list is read out to expansion buffer 81 of VRAM 75 in step S2112. Know the address of your area. In this case, if it is during the simple display period, the address of the area in which the effect image data after the enlargement processing is written is grasped in the development buffer 81 . On the other hand, during the normal display period, the address of the area in the expansion buffer 81 from which the normal effect image data ED5 corresponding to the current update timing is read is grasped. In subsequent step S2113, parameter information to be applied to the current image data is grasped.

By executing the setting process for the simultaneous display effect, the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be drawn are displayed in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the subsequent writing process (step S1105). is rendered with the parameter information applied. Further, during the simple display period, the effect image data after the enlargement processing is drawn as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 with the parameter information applied. The normal effect image data ED5 for displaying the effect image EG6 is drawn with the parameter information applied.

At the start timing of the multiple display period, simple effect image data ED6 is used as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of image data for displaying the production characters CH3 to CH7 are read at the start timing of the multiple display period, the time required to read the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is shortened. is planned. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the image data reading period at the start timing of the multiple display period, and increase the production characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed at the start timing of the multiple display period and display the increase effect image EG6. It is possible to preferably perform both the start and the start. Further, according to this configuration, it is necessary to read the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 at a timing before the start of the multiple display period. there is no need to set up a program for forwarding in advance.

The image data set to have a small number of pixels in order to shorten the time required to read the image data is used to display the effect image EG6 for the increase, not the image data for displaying the production characters CH3 to CH7. is the image data of As a result, it is possible to suitably display images at the start timing of the multiple display period while preventing the image quality of the production characters CH3 to CH7, which stand out in the image display, from deteriorating.

When the multiple display period has progressed to some extent, the image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6 is changed from the simple effect image data ED6 to the normal effect image data ED5. As a result, the image quality of the increase effect image EG6 can be made suitable from the middle of the multiple display period.

The simple effect image data ED6 is subjected to enlargement processing at the timing when it is read, and the effect image data after the enlargement processing is used in the subsequent simple display period. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which the enlargement process is executed each time during the simple display period.

<Another form of configuration related to simultaneous display effect>
The simple effect image data ED6 may be provided as image data for displaying the increase effect image EG6, but the normal effect image data ED5 may not be provided. Even in this case, it is possible to display the increase effect image ED6 while shortening the time required to read the image data at the start timing of the multiple display period. In this configuration, the enlargement processing is executed so that the simple effect image data ED6 has the same resolution as the image data for displaying the production characters CH3 to CH7.

The simple effect image data ED6 is configured to have half the resolution of the normal effect image data ED5, but is not limited to this, and may be configured to have, for example, a quarter of the resolution. Alternatively, the resolution may be set to 1/3, or the resolution may be set to 2/3.

A configuration may be employed in which there is a period during which the simple effect image data ED6 is used after being enlarged as in the above embodiment and a period during which the image data ED6 is used with the resolution stored in the memory module 74 . For example, when the increase effect image EG6 is displayed using the entire display surface P, the simple effect image data ED6 is enlarged and used to partition a portion of the display surface P. When the increase effect image EG6 is displayed within the defined area, the simple effect image data ED6 may be used with the same resolution.

- Instead of providing only one simple effect image data ED6, a plurality of simple effect image data ED6 may be provided. Thus, even when the increase effect image EG6 is displayed using the simple effect image data ED6, it is possible to change the display mode of the increase effect image EG6. In this configuration, all the simple effect image data ED6 is not read out collectively at the timing of starting the display of the increase effect image EG6 using the simple effect image data ED6, but is used at each update timing. It is preferable that the simple effect image data ED6 to be processed is read individually, and the enlargement processing (step S2109) is performed on the read simple effect image data ED6.

<Second embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the electrical configuration regarding display control. Differences from the first embodiment will be described below. FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration in this embodiment.

The configuration shown in FIG. 41 includes a main controller 50 as in the first embodiment. In addition, the main controller 50 includes a payout controller 55 that controls a payout device 56, and a power supply/controller that functions to supply power to each device including the main controller 50 and to drive and control the game ball shooting mechanism 58. The launch control device 57, the special figure unit 37 displaying the result of the game cycle, and the general figure unit 38 displaying the result of the general electric open lottery are electrically connected. In addition, an audio light emission control device 60 is provided that drives and controls the display light emission unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 50. A display control device 130 is provided for controlling the pattern display device 41 based on the above.

As shown in FIG. 41, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. .

The display CPU 131 functions as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 131 is connected via a bus to an input port 137 mounted on a display control board 136, and various commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 through the input port 137. be done.

The display CPU 131 is connected to a work RAM 132, a memory module 133 and a VRAM 134 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60. Give transfer instructions. Further, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60, issues a drawing instruction for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the pattern display device 41. conduct. The memory module 133, work RAM 132, VRAM 134 and VDP 135 will be described below.

The memory module 133 is storage means for pre-storing control data including control programs and fixed value data, and pre-storing various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image. The memory module 133 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require power supply from the outside to retain data. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the memory module 133 is used as a non-write-only read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 133 include object data such as patterns and characters to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, texture data to be pasted on the object data, and the backmost image in one frame image. and the image data for the back side that constitutes the image of the .

Here, object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of vertices of three-dimensional coordinates. For example, since a surface model is applied to the object data, the vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates preset for each object data as the origin. In other words, each object data three-dimensionally defines the relative position (that is, orientation and size) of each polygon in a self-contained local coordinate system.

Texture data is an image to be pasted on each polygon of object data. By pasting texture data to object data, an image corresponding to the object data, such as a display image including patterns and characters, for example, is generated. Texture data may be held in any manner, but may include, for example, at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image.

The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The image data for the back surface may be held in any manner, but for example, the two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as compressed JPEG format data. Incidentally, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, plate-like object data (that is, plate polygons) is used.

The work RAM 132 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read from the memory module 133 and transferred, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 132 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires power supply from the outside for storing data, and more specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133 . Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 134 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the pattern display device 41 . The VRAM 134 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing data, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 134 has an expansion buffer 141 , and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 135 to the memory module 133 . The VRAM 134 is also provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 135 .

The VDP 135 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the pattern display device 41 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 131, using the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 141, specifically by processing the data. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated in the pattern display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 41a. Since the VDP 135 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing dedicated firmware for drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation section 151 , a rendering section 152 , a register 153 and a display circuit 155 . These circuits are interconnected via a bus, and are also connected to an I/F 156 for the display CPU 131 and an I/F 157 for the VRAM 134 .

The I/F 156 for the display CPU 131 causes the register 153 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131 . Based on the drawing list stored in the register 153 , the geometry calculation unit 151 reads various image data stored in the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 . Also, the geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object data designated as the object to be arranged in the world coordinate system. Also, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object data in the world coordinate system. Finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display plane P.

Based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, the rendering unit 152 adjusts the light source and applies texture data to each clipped object data to determine the appearance of the object data. The rendering unit 152 also projects each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and performs various adjustments based on depth information to convert one frame of drawing data, which is two-dimensional data, into a frame. Create in buffer 142 . Drawing data for one frame is data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

It should be noted that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by a drawing list. may be configured such that the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 execute processing depending on the contents of . Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 133 in advance. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute processing only by operation of hardware circuits corresponding to the drawing list without using programs.

Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame region 142a and a second frame region 142b are provided. Each of these frame areas 142a and 142b is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full-color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each color of RGB in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system, and for example, in a configuration in which each dot can display only 256 colors, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 142 is provided with the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b, drawing data created in one of the frame areas is used to perform drawing on the pattern display device 41. , creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame regions is executed. That is, the frame buffer 142 employs a double buffer system.

In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b. It is output to the pattern display device 41 through the connected output port 138 . Specifically, drawing data is transferred to the display circuit 155 from the frame regions 142 a and 142 b to be output. The transferred drawing data is adjusted in resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 41 and converted into gradation data. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the pattern display device 41 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal.

<Basic processing in the display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described. The display CPU 131 executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. The contents of the command interrupt processing are the same as in the first embodiment. Also, the contents of the V interrupt processing are the same as the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment except for the task processing of step S608.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing task processing in this embodiment.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the delay flag provided in the work RAM 132 is set to "1". If the delay flag is not set to "1" (step S2201: NO), a setting process for starting control is executed in step S2202. In the control start setting process, the display CPU 131 executes a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control in this processing. In this embodiment, an individual image is one 2D image defined by still image data such as back image data, or one 3D image defined by a combination of object data and texture data. be.

Specifically, regarding the control start setting processing, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in this processing cycle. If it exists, the work RAM 132 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds to the individual image grasped as the control start target on a one-to-one basis. Allocate a free buffer area so that Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved empty buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control corresponding to the individual image is set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

In the subsequent step S2202, the control update target is grasped. This control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed and which may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing.

After that, in step S2204, a new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted, and in immediately following step S2205, a new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited, and then the background calculation process is executed (step S2206). In the background calculation process, the coordinates in the world coordinate system, the rotation angle, the scale, the light information for adding contrast, and the projection for the backmost image that constitutes the background image and the background character are calculated. A process of calculating and deriving various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information and Z-test designation is executed.

After that, in step S2207, a new activation of V interrupt processing is permitted, and in step S2208, immediately after, new activation of V interrupt processing is prohibited, and then an effect arithmetic processing is executed (step S2209). In the performance calculation processing, processing for calculating and deriving the various parameter information described above is executed for individual images to be displayed in various performances such as ready-to-win display, advance notice display, and jackpot performance.

After that, in step S2210, a new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted, and in immediately following step S2211, a new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited, and then the symbol calculation process is executed (step S2212). In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameter information is executed for the image of the symbol that is the target of the variable display in each game cycle.

Incidentally, in each of the processes of steps S2206, S2209, and S2212, a process of updating the parameter information for starting control set in step S2201 is executed. Also, in each of the processes in steps S2206, S2209, and S2212, animation data set so as to change various parameter information of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image is updated is used. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. Animation data is stored in the memory module 133 in advance. Further, in the symbol arithmetic processing, when an execution target table for fraud notification or status notification is read into the work RAM 132, an arithmetic processing for displaying a notification image corresponding to the execution target table is executed. A notification sprite for displaying the notification image and various parameter information applied to the notification sprite are derived.

After that, in step S2213, the operation completion flag provided in the work RAM 132 is set to "1", and in step S2214, after executing the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system, this task process ends. . In the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system, the individual image set as the drawing target in the current drawing list is selected from among the individual images subject to control update by the processes in steps S2206, S2209, and S2212. Do what you know. The grasping is performed based on the currently set execution target table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

That is, since more individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 are set than individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S2214. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 131 and the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 135 may be the same. In this case, the process of step S2214 is executed. no longer needed.

On the other hand, if the delay flag is set to "1" (step S2201: YES), after the delay flag is cleared to "0" in step S2215, a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is performed in the previous task processing. is jumped to the process that was being executed immediately before starting (step S2216). As a result, it is possible to restart the execution of the process from the timing at which the previous task process was interrupted. Note that the contents of the delay flag and the operation completion flag are the same as those in the first embodiment, and in task processing, steps S2201, steps S2204 to S2205, steps S2207 to S2208, steps S2210 to S2211, and steps S2213 Execution of steps S2215 and S2216 also has the same effects as in the first embodiment.

<Basic processing in VDP 135>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

In the VDP 135, processing for setting the value of the register 153 based on the command sent from the display CPU 131, processing for creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 131, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the pattern display device 41 based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b is executed.

Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) associated with the I/F 156 for the display CPU 131 . In addition, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 . Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

The processing for creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to the description of this process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, target buffer information indicating which of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created for the one-frame image related to the drawing list is set. there is Various designation information is set in the header information.

In addition to the above header information, the drawing list contains multiple types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system when creating the drawing data this time. Parameter information of each image data is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set to be serial numbered numerical information, and the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

In the drawing list of FIG. 43(a), the background image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. there is In addition, the image data for effect is set after the image data for background, for example, object A for effect is set as m-th, object B for effect is m+1, and so on. there is In addition, the image data for the design is set as the order after the image data for the effect, for example, the design object A is set as the n-th, the design object B is set as the (n+1)th, and so on. there is

The order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the one described above, and the order in which the image data is set may be the order opposite to that described above. Image data for effect or image data for background may be set after the data, and image data for design is set in order between predetermined image data for effect and other image data for effect. may have been

In the parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3), ..., P(m), P(m+1), ..., P(n), P(n+1), ... , multiple types of parameter information are set. Specifically, regarding the parameter information P(1) of the image data for the rear surface, as shown in FIG. Coordinate information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the image data for the back, and world coordinates when setting the image data for the back Rotation angle information that indicates the rotation angle in the system, scale information that indicates the magnification when setting to the world coordinate system with respect to the scale that is set as the initial state of the image data for the back, and and uniform α value information indicating overall transparency information (or transparency information) when image data is set.

Here, coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of the object data. Also, this coordinate information is set for the object data, but is not set for the texture data. In the texture data, coordinate values of each pixel are predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 133 in a state attached to a combination of object data and texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 during texture mapping.

The parameter information (P1) includes camera information including information on the coordinates and direction of the virtual camera when projecting the image data for the back onto a virtual two-dimensional plane for rendering, and the image data for the back. and light information, including position and orientation information of a virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case.

The parameter information (P1) contains Z-test designation information indicating whether or not the Z-buffer method, which is a type of method for removing hidden surfaces, is applied. In the Z-buffer method, when many objects and two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) lined up on the Z-axis This is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to and the numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 142a and 142b.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is also used as a method for removing hidden surfaces. The Z-sorting method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set in each pixel arranged on the Z-axis is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 142a and 142b. When applying the Z sorting method, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In such a state, addition processing of the numerical information and arithmetic processing for fusion are executed. Although a detailed description of the processing configuration of hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, it is activated when an effect image is to be displayed.

The parameter information (P1) includes α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is to be applied and to whom it is applied, and fog designation information indicating whether or not fog is to be applied and to which fog is to be applied.

Here, the α value is the transparency information of the corresponding pixel. As methods for setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. A uniform α value is transparency information that is applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information that is derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131 . The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data or texture data, and is stored in the memory module 133 in advance as image data. The α data can vary the transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting the uniform α value.

By setting the uniform α value and α data as described above, the transparency of two-dimensional still image data and texture data can be uniformly controlled for all pixels rather than finely controlled for each pixel. In a situation where it is sufficient, the necessary data capacity can be reduced by being able to deal with a uniform α value, and by applying the α data, it is also possible to finely control the degree of transparency for each pixel.

Fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically in the Z-axis direction, in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to express fog or the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, the image for one frame is fogged in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if the same fog as other objects is applied to the object located on the back side in the Z-axis direction, it will be too dark and the texture will not be obtained, so another fog is set for the object. configuration. As a result, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while not impairing the texture.

In other parameters such as parameter information P(2), as shown in FIG. 43(c), among the various types of information shown in FIG. information and is set. As such information, address information of areas in which objects and textures are stored in the memory module 133 is set.

Drawing processing in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, the manner in which drawing data is created as the drawing process is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 131 or not. If a new drawing list has been received, a background setting process is executed in step S2302.

In the background setting process, the background image data for displaying the background image and the object data for displaying the character are grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and object data are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

If it is not arranged, an empty buffer area to be referred to for arranging in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and when an empty buffer area is secured, the area is initialized. After that, the address where the image data is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped and read out, and the coordinate values of the local coordinate system for the image data are set so that the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale specified in the drawing list are obtained. to the coordinate values of the world coordinate system, and set in the buffer area secured above.

If so, the various parameters set in the already reserved buffer area are updated. In the background setting process, a control end process is executed to erase background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

In the following step S2303, setting processing for effect is executed. In the effect setting process, the object data for displaying the effect image is grasped from among the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data has already been arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If so, update processing of various parameters is executed. Also, in the effect setting process, a control end process is executed to erase image data for effect not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

In the subsequent step S2304, a design setting process is executed. In the design setting process, the object data for displaying the design is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data has already been arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If so, update processing of various parameters is executed. Also, in the design setting process, a control end process is executed to erase image data for a design not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

By executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304, as shown in FIG. 45, the drawing list designates the drawing list as a placement target within the world coordinate system defined by the X, Y, and Z axes. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the backmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angles and scales also designated by the drawing list is completed.

FIG. 45 simply shows how the image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged. Further, the image data PC1 for the backmost image does not need to have the coordinates in the Z-axis direction set to the far side with respect to all of the various object data PC2 to PC10. may be arranged in a bent or tilted state so that the coordinates in the Z-axis direction are closer to the user than part of the object data. However, the area of the image data PC1 for the rearmost image, which has the same coordinates in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction as the part of the object data, has the coordinates in the Z-axis direction behind the object data. As a result, all the object data are not covered with the image data PC1 for the rearmost image.

In subsequent step S2305, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint, the world coordinate system is set with the viewpoint as the origin. Convert to the camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, a viewpoint PC11 indicated by a camera shape is set, and a corresponding coordinate system is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and in reality there is a camera coordinate system for each individual image. . By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, it becomes possible to switch viewpoints individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 45 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

In subsequent step S2306, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image closer to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image farther from the viewpoint is reduced.

In subsequent step S2307, clipping processing is executed. In the clipping process, the respective individual images extracted in step S2306 are grasped with their respective corresponding viewpoints as a common origin. Then, in this state, the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 45) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b (that is, the display surface P of the pattern display device 41) to be drawn is used as a reference, and is extracted in step S2306. clip each individual image

In the following step S2308, lighting processing is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process. .

In the following step S2309, color information setting processing is executed. In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information in units of pixels (that is, in units of polygons) or in units of vertices for each object extracted by the clipping process. In such color information setting processing, basically, texture mapping processing is executed to paste texture data corresponding to each object data extracted by the clipping processing. Also, depending on the situation, processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping are performed.

Thereafter, in steps S2310 and S2311, each individual image extracted in step S2307 and for which lighting processing and color information setting processing have been completed is projected onto the screen region PC12, which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). or parallel projection) to create drawing data.

Specifically, first, in step S2310, background drawing data creation processing is executed. In the drawing data creation process for the background, the object data and the image data for the backmost image set as the background image are projected onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal. Create data.

Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. Buffers for effects and patterns are set in which the drawing data for the game are collectively written. In addition, areas with the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC12 are set in the buffer for background and the buffer for effects and patterns. The background drawing data created in step S2310 is written to the background buffer. Note that if the background image data is not specified in the drawing list, the background drawing data is not created.

In the subsequent step S2311, drawing data creation processing for effects and symbols is executed. In the drawing data creation process for effects and patterns, the object data set as the effect image and the object data set as the pattern are projected onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal. Drawing data for effects and patterns are created in buffers for effects and patterns in buffer 144 . Incidentally, when the image data for effects and patterns are not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for effects and patterns are not created.

After that, in step S2312, the drawing data synthesizing process is executed, and then the drawing process ends. In the drawing data synthesizing process in step S2312, the drawing data for the background and the drawing data for effects and patterns, which have been individually created in the screen buffer 144 by the processes in steps S2310 and S2311, are synthesized, The synthesized result is written as drawing data for one frame in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b.

In this case, the writing order is defined to be arranged from the back side to the front side in the order of drawing data for background→drawing data for effect and design. Therefore, the drawing data for the background is first written into the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, and then the drawing data for effects and patterns are written. At this time, if the target pixel for drawing has a completely transparent α value, the image on the back side is used as it is, and if a semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is changed. The background image and the foreground image are fused at the standard ratio, and if the opaque α value is set, the foreground image is overwritten on the background image. , the operations for blending are performed.

Incidentally, although each piece of drawing data is defined to have an area of one frame, a completely transparent α value is set for the blank portion where projection is not performed in the drawing data for effects and patterns.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. An image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the pattern display device 41 based on the created drawing data. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing after one frame for the relevant frame. The display circuit 155 also has a selector circuit for alternately switching between the frame regions 142a and 142b to be referenced each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. The frame areas 142a and 142b, which are drawing targets, are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

Note that steps S2302 to S2307 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and steps S2308 to S2312 are processes executed by the rendering unit 152. FIG.

<Configuration for performing loop production>
Next, a configuration for performing a loop effect will be described.

A loop effect is a effect in which a moving image in which a character for loop effect performs a predetermined action is repeatedly displayed during a predetermined period of a plurality of image update timings. The image of the last frame and the image of the start frame in the moving image for the loop effect are set so as to have continuity. Specifically, the image of the last frame and the image of the start frame are set so as to have continuity so that the player recognizes that the motion of the character for loop effect is a continuous motion. As a result, when the same moving image for loop effect is displayed again after the moving image for loop effect has made one round, the movement of the character for loop effect can be made smooth.

The content of the loop effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the moving image display in the loop effect.

As shown in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b), a plurality of loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are simultaneously displayed on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 during the loop effect. Specifically, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are displayed at the same time. 46(a) and 46(b) show loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 in a simplified manner, loop effect A character CH8 and loop effect B character CH9 have a face, a body, both hands, and both legs. is displayed in such a way that the player perceives it to represent a person with Also, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are different characters in at least one of patterns including facial expressions and clothing patterns, outer edge shapes and sizes. It is displayed so that the player can recognize it. During the loop effect, a moving image is displayed so that the player recognizes that the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are performing different actions.

As loop effects, a first loop effect mode shown in FIG. 46(a) and a second loop effect mode shown in FIG. 46(b) are set. In the first loop effect mode and the second loop effect mode, as shown in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b), the loop effect A character CH8 performed during one round of the corresponding loop effect moving image The action contents are different, and the action contents of the loop effect B character CH9 performed in one round of the corresponding loop effect animation are also different. Then, when the loop effect is executed, after the first animation period in which the loop effect moving image in the first loop effect mode is repeated a plurality of times, the loop effect moving image in the second loop effect mode is performed. A second animation period is performed that is repeated multiple times.

A loop effect is executed as an effect for a game round, and occurs in a game round resulting in a big win. The first animation period occurs before the combination of symbols indicating the result of the big win is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, and the second animation period occurs on the display surface P of the symbols indicating the result of the big win. Occurs after the combination of is displayed. Therefore, during the first animation period, an action display that expects a big win result is performed by each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, and during the second animation period, a big win result is displayed. A motion display congratulating the achievement is performed by each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9.

When the loop effect is executed as described above, when the animation for the loop effect is repeated in each of the first loop effect mode and the second loop effect mode, the loop effect is performed by the image of the final frame and the image of the start frame. The action of the A character CH8 for use has continuity, and the action of the B character CH9 for loop effect has continuity. On the other hand, between the image of the last frame in the moving image for loop effect in the first loop effect mode and the image of the start frame in the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode, the loop effect A character CH8 The action does not have continuity, and the action of the loop effect B character CH9 does not have continuity.

Therefore, when the second animation period is performed after the first animation period is performed, data for displaying the image of the last frame in the moving image for the loop effect in the first loop effect mode and the second loop effect A second animation period is started after an interpolation display period in which interpolation display is performed using data derived using the data for displaying the image of the start frame in the moving image for the loop effect according to the aspect. . A specific configuration for executing the loop effect will be described below.

First, the data configuration for executing the loop effect will be described. FIG. 47(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the memory module 133 for executing the loop effect. As shown in FIG. 47(a), the memory module 133 stores a first animation for the A character for causing the A character for loop effect CH8 to perform an action display corresponding to the moving image for the loop effect in the first loop effect mode. Animation data AD1, second animation data AD2 for character A for causing loop effect A character CH8 to perform motion display corresponding to the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode, and second animation data AD2 for character A in the first loop effect mode The first animation data AD3 for the B character for causing the B character CH9 for the loop effect to perform the action display corresponding to the moving picture for the loop effect, and the action display corresponding to the moving picture for the loop effect in the second loop effect mode. Second animation data AD4 for the B character to be performed by the B character CH9 for loop effect is stored in advance.

Each of the animation data AD1 to AD4 is data for determining the coordinates of each vertex in the object data for displaying the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. A plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in each of the animation data AD1 to AD4 so as to have serial numbers, and each piece of pointer information is set with the coordinate data of each vertex in the corresponding object data. The pointer information is updated when progressing by one frame (each time the image update timing is reached) in the situation where the loop effect is being performed, and the coordinate data to be referred to is changed to the next one in accordance with the update of the pointer information. It will be changed. In this case, the continuous coordinate data are set so that the corresponding loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 perform motion display corresponding to the corresponding loop effect animation.

As described above, the first animation data AD1 and AD3 are provided for displaying the moving image for loop effect in the first loop effect mode, and the second animation data AD1 and AD3 are provided for displaying the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode. Animation data AD2 and AD4 are provided. In this way, the animation data AD1 to AD4 are separately provided in association with the loop effect moving images in each loop effect mode. It is possible to suppress the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 to be read. By suppressing the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 read at one time, it is possible to spread the period required for reading the animation data AD1 to AD4.

Further, even if the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are displayed at the same time and the moving image for the loop effect is displayed in the same period, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH8 are displayed simultaneously. Animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided corresponding to each of the characters CH9. As a result, the animation data AD1 and AD3 for moving the loop effect A character CH8 and the animation data AD2 and AD4 for moving the loop effect B character CH9 can be handled separately.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the memory module 133 is provided with a combination table CT in addition to the animation data AD1 to AD4 as data for executing loop effects. The combination table CT is data that determines the combination ratio of the coordinate data based on the first animation data AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data based on the second animation data AD2 and AD4 at each update timing of the interpolation display period.

The combination table CT will be described in detail with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 47(b). The combination table CT includes pointer information set in one-to-one correspondence with all update timings included in the interpolation display period, and coordinate data by the first animation data AD1 and AD3 at update timings corresponding to each pointer information. and the data of the mixing ratio with the coordinate data by the second animation data AD2 and AD4 are set. Specifically, from the start timing to the end timing of the interpolation display period, the blending ratio of the coordinate data based on the first animation data AD1 and AD3 gradually decreases, and the blending ratio of the coordinate data based on the second animation data AD2 and AD4 gradually decreases. The combination table CT is set so that . In this case, the combination of the coordinate table by the combination table CT is performed for the final timing coordinate data by the first animation data AD1 and AD3 and the start timing coordinate data by the second animation data AD2 and AD4. Therefore, during the interpolated display period, the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are displayed as moving images so as to gradually change from the display mode at the final timing of the first animation period to the display mode at the start timing of the second animation period.

Next, how the loop effect is executed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 48(a) shows the first animation period, and FIG. 48(b) shows the timing at which the animation for loop effect is newly started in the first loop effect mode based on the first animation data AD1, AD3. 48(c) shows the interpolated display period, FIG. 48(d) shows the second animation period, and FIG. 48(e) shows the animation for the loop effect in the second loop effect mode based on the second animation data AD2, AD4. indicates the timing at which is newly started.

At timing t1, the first animation period starts as shown in FIG. 48(a), and at timings t1, t2, and t3, as shown in FIG. Display laps of the moving image for loop effect according to the mode are newly started. After that, at timing t4, which is the timing at which the display cycle of the moving image for the loop effect in the first loop effect mode that started at timing t3 ends, the first animation period ends as shown in FIG. 48(a). , the interpolation display period is started as shown in FIG. 48(c). The interpolation display period continues until timing t5.

When the interpolated display period ends at the timing t5, the second animation period starts as shown in FIG. 48(d). Then, at each of timing t5, timing t6, and timing t7, as shown in FIG. 48(e), display circulation of the animation for loop effect in the second loop effect mode is newly started. After that, the second animation period ends as shown in FIG. be.

Incidentally, the duration T2 of the interpolated display period is the period T1 required for the animation for the loop effect in the first loop effect mode to make one cycle in the first animation period, and the loop effect in the second loop effect mode in the second animation period. It is set shorter than the period T3 required for the moving image for one cycle.

A specific processing configuration for executing the loop effect will be described below. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for loop effects executed by the display CPU 131 . Arithmetic processing for loop effects is executed in the arithmetic processing for effects in step S2209 in task processing (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for the loop effect is started when information about the loop effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is the first animation period (step S2401: YES), it is determined in step S2402 whether or not it is time to start the first animation period. If it is time to start the first animation period (step S2402: YES), the first animation data AD1 for character A and the first animation data AD3 for character B are read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2403). In the subsequent step S2404, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 is grasped. The image data includes object data corresponding to loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to loop effect B character CH9, and loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data. After that, in step S2405, loop effect start designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that the loop effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402 or if the process of step S2405 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2406). The image data includes object data corresponding to loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to loop effect B character CH9, and loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2407, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Specifically, since this time is the first animation period, the coordinate data of all the vertices set in the first animation data AD1 for the A character corresponding to the pointer information at the current update timing are read, In the first animation data AD3 for the B character, the coordinate data of all the vertices set corresponding to the pointer information at this update timing are read. Then, these read coordinate data are written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the object data of the A character CH8 for loop effect and the area secured corresponding to the object data of the B character CH9 for loop effect. to update the control information. As a result, the A character CH8 for loop effect can be operated according to the first animation data AD1 for the A character, and the B character CH9 for loop effect can be operated according to the first animation data AD3 for the B character. It becomes possible.

In the subsequent step S2408, parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2406, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The information for control is updated by writing into the area secured by and the area secured corresponding to the object data of the B character CH9 for loop effect. After that, in step S2409, loop effect specifying information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

If it is the interpolation display period (step S2401: NO, step S2410: YES), the interpolation display period processing is executed in step S2411. In the interpolation display period processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not it is time to start interpolation display on the front side.

In the interpolated display period, as already explained, the coordinate data of each vertex of the loop effect A character CH8 is a combination of the first animation data AD1 for the character A and the second animation data AD2 for the character A at a predetermined ratio. and the coordinate data of each vertex in the loop effect B character CH9 is obtained by blending the first animation data AD3 for the B character and the second animation data AD4 for the B character at a predetermined ratio. derived. In this case, the derivation of the coordinate data by combination is not started simultaneously for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, but the coordinate data for the loop effect A character CH8 is derived by combination. is started first, and at the next image update timing, the derivation of coordinate data for the loop effect B character CH9 is started.

This content will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 51(a) shows the image update timing, FIG. 51(b) shows the first animation period of the loop effect A character CH8, and FIG. 51(c) shows the interpolated display period of the loop effect A character CH8. 51(d) shows the first animation period of the loop effect B character CH9, and FIG. 51(e) shows the interpolation display period of the loop effect B character CH9.

The timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t3, and the timing of t4 are each the update timing of the image as shown in FIG. 51(a). In this case, for the loop effect A character CH8, the first animation period ends as shown in FIG. 51(b) and the interpolation display period starts as shown in FIG. 51(c) at time t2. be. However, at the timing t2, the first animation period continues for the loop effect B character CH9. After that, at the timing t3, which is the update timing after one frame, the first animation period for the loop effect B character CH9 ends as shown in FIG. , the interpolation display period starts.

Returning to the description of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50), the start timing of the interpolation display period is the start timing of derivation of coordinate data for loop effect A character CH8 by combination. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2501 and the process proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, the second animation data AD2 for the A character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. FIG. Also, in step S2503, the combination table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. FIG.

In subsequent step S2504, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The image data includes object data corresponding to loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to loop effect B character CH9, and loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2505, the coordinate data of each vertex of the loop effect A character CH8 is updated. In the updating process, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing of the second animation data AD2 for the A character are stored in the combination table CT. Mix at a ratio corresponding to the initial pointer information. Specifically, the coordinate data of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 and the coordinate data of the start timing in the second animation data AD2 are blended at a ratio of 95:5 between corresponding vertices. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination into an area secured in the work RAM 132 in association with the object data of the loop effect A character CH8.

After that, in step S2506, the coordinate data of each vertex of the loop effect B character CH9 is updated. Specifically, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for the B character is read. Then, the control information is updated by writing the read coordinate data in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the object data of the B character CH9 for loop effect. Here, even at the update timing immediately before, that is, at the final timing of the first animation period, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for the B character is used as the coordinate data for each vertex of the loop effect B character CH9. is used. Therefore, at the start timing of the interpolation display period, the coordinate data of each vertex of the loop effect B character CH9 is not changed from the previous update timing.

In the subsequent step S2507, parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2504, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The information for control is updated by writing into the area secured by and the area secured corresponding to the object data of the B character CH9 for loop effect. After that, in step S2508, loop effect specifying information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

If it is the next image update timing with respect to the interpolation display period start timing (step S2501: NO, step S2509: YES), the second animation data AD4 for the B character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2510). Also, in step S2511, the combination table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. FIG. At the start timing of the interpolation display period, the combination table CT to be applied to the animation data AD1 and AD2 for the A character has already been read to the work RAM 132 in step S2503, as described above. On the other hand, by newly reading out the combination table CT in step S2511, the combination table CT to be applied to the animation data AD1 and AD2 for the A character and the combination table CT to be applied to the animation data AD3 and AD4 for the B character are read out to the work RAM 132 individually. As a result, even if the combination of coordinate data using the combination table CT is started with a delay of one update timing between the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the combination table It is possible to start blending coordinate data from the ratio corresponding to the first pointer information by CT.

In subsequent step S2512, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The image data includes object data corresponding to loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to loop effect B character CH9, and loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2513, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. In the updating process, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing of the second animation data AD2 for the A character are converted into the A The combination table CT corresponding to the character CH8 is blended at a ratio corresponding to the current pointer information. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination into an area secured in the work RAM 132 in association with the object data of the loop effect A character CH8. Further, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for character B and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing in the second animation data AD4 for character B are transferred to character B for loop effect CH9. In the corresponding combination table CT, it is blended at a ratio corresponding to the current pointer information. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination into an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the object data of the B character CH9 for loop effect.

In the subsequent step S2507, parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2512, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The information for control is updated by writing into the area secured by and the area secured corresponding to the object data of the B character CH9 for loop effect. After that, in step S2508, loop effect specifying information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

If it is the interpolation display period and the update timing is later than the interpolation display start timing on the rear side (step S2501: NO, step S2509: NO), the process proceeds to step S2512 without executing the processing of steps S2510 and S2511. . In step S2512, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The image data includes object data corresponding to loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to loop effect B character CH9, and loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2513, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. In the updating process, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing of the second animation data AD2 for the A character are converted into the A The combination table CT corresponding to the character CH8 is blended at a ratio corresponding to the current pointer information. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination into an area secured in the work RAM 132 in association with the object data of the loop effect A character CH8. Further, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for character B and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing in the second animation data AD4 for character B are transferred to character B for loop effect CH9. In the corresponding combination table CT, it is blended at a ratio corresponding to the current pointer information. Then, the control information is updated by writing the coordinate data obtained by the combination into an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the object data of the B character CH9 for loop effect.

In the subsequent step S2507, parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2512, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The information for control is updated by writing into the area secured by and the area secured corresponding to the object data of the B character CH9 for loop effect. After that, in step S2508, loop effect specifying information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for the loop effect (FIG. 49), if it is the second animation period (steps S2401 and S2410: NO), based on the currently set execution target table, the current update timing corresponding to the The type of image data is grasped (step S2406). The image data includes object data corresponding to loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to loop effect B character CH9, and loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2407, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Specifically, since this time is the second animation period, the coordinate data of all the vertices set in the second animation data AD2 for the A character corresponding to the pointer information at the current update timing are read, In the second animation data AD4 for the B character, the coordinate data of all the vertices set corresponding to the pointer information at the current update timing are read. Then, these read coordinate data are written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the object data of the A character CH8 for loop effect and the area secured corresponding to the object data of the B character CH9 for loop effect. to update the control information. As a result, the A character for loop effect CH8 can be operated according to the second animation data AD2 for the A character, and the B character for loop effect CH9 can be operated according to the second animation data for B character AD4. It becomes possible.

In the subsequent step S2408, parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2406, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The information for control is updated by writing into the area secured by and the area secured corresponding to the object data of the B character CH9 for loop effect. After that, in step S2409, loop effect specifying information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

When the arithmetic processing for the loop effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) contains the object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the loop Information for instructing the use of the texture data corresponding to the effect A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the texture data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9 is set. In addition, parameter information to be applied to the image data including the coordinate data of each vertex is set in the drawing list. In addition, loop effect designation information is set in the drawing list, and loop effect start designation information is set at the start timing of the loop effect.

Next, the setting processing for loop effects executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The loop effect setting process is executed as part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the loop effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the loop effect is executed.

If loop effect start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S2601: YES), the object corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8 in the memory module 133 is determined from the address information set in the drawing list. Data, texture data corresponding to A character CH8 for loop effect, object data corresponding to B character CH9 for loop effect, and texture data corresponding to B character CH9 for loop effect are stored, and grasped. Based on the result, these image data are read from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S2602).

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or if the processing in step S2602 is executed, in step S2603, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped. Also, in step S2604, the coordinate data of each vertex in the world coordinate system for each of the object data for displaying the loop effect A character CH8 and the object data for displaying the loop effect B character CH9 is converted to the current coordinate data. Grasped from the drawing list, and in step S2605, other parameter information of these object data and corresponding texture data is grasped. Then, in step S2606, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasped results in steps S2603 to S2605.

By executing the loop effect setting process as described above, the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 and the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 are arranged in the world coordinate system, and the object data Coordinate data derived from each animation data AD1 to AD4 is applied as the coordinate data of each vertex. As a result, on the display surface P, a moving image is displayed so that the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 move in respective modes corresponding to the first animation period, the interpolated display period, and the second animation period. will be

First animation data AD1 and AD3 are provided for displaying the moving image for loop effect in the first loop effect mode, and second animation data AD2 are provided for displaying the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode. , AD4 are provided. In this way, the animation data AD1 to AD4 are separately provided in association with the loop effect moving images in each loop effect mode. It is possible to suppress the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 to be read. By suppressing the data amount of the animation data AD1 to AD4 read at one time, it is possible to spread the period required for reading the animation data AD1 to AD4.

Further, even if the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are displayed at the same time and the moving image for the loop effect is displayed in the same period, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH8 are displayed simultaneously. Animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided corresponding to each of the characters CH9. As a result, the animation data AD1 and AD3 for moving the loop effect A character CH8 and the animation data AD2 and AD4 for moving the loop effect B character CH9 can be handled separately.

Between the first animation period in which the moving image for loop effect in the first loop effect mode is displayed and the second animation period in which the moving image for loop effect in the second loop effect mode is displayed, first animation data An interpolation display period is set for moving image display using the coordinate data derived by blending the coordinate data of AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data of the second animation data AD2 and AD4 at a predetermined ratio. As a result, even if the continuity of the action display of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 is not ensured between the first animation data AD1 and AD2 and the second animation data AD2 and AD4, the second animation is performed from the first animation period to the second animation. It is possible to ensure the continuity of the action display of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 when transitioning to the period.

The timing at which the first animation period ends and the interpolation display period starts for loop effect A character CH8 and the timing at which the first animation period ends and the interpolation display period starts for loop effect B character CH9 are different. They are set to have different update timings. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely large at the start timing of the interpolation display period.

With respect to the timing when the first animation period ends and the interpolation display period starts for the loop effect A character CH8, the first animation period ends and the interpolation for the loop effect B character CH9 occurs at the next image update timing. A display period begins. As a result, even if the start timing of the interpolated display period is different between the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, when the second animation period is started in the loop effect A character CH8, makes it possible to early start the second animation period in the loop effect B character CH9.

The same combination table CT is used in both the interpolation display period for the loop effect A character CH8 and the interpolation display period for the loop effect B character CH9. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to execute the interpolation display period.

<Another form of configuration related to loop production>
・When the loop effect is executed, it is not limited to the configuration in which both the first animation period and the second animation period always occur. As the effect of the first animation period, the second animation period does not occur. may be configured to generate In this case, only the first animation period may occur as the loop effect, and the second animation period may occur after the first animation period. It is preferable to distinguish between the second animation data AD2 and AD4. In such a configuration in which the animation data AD1 to AD4 are separately provided for the first animation period and for the second animation period, the motions of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 can be made smooth as in the above embodiment. It is preferable to set the interpolation display period as much as possible.

・The first animation period for the loop effect B character CH9 ends at the next image update timing with respect to the timing when the first animation period ends and the interpolation display period starts for the loop effect A character CH8. The interpolation display period is not limited to the configuration in which the interpolation display period is started, and after a plurality of update timings with respect to the former timing, the first animation period for the loop effect B character CH9 ends and the interpolation display period starts. It may be configured to be

・The start timing of the process of deriving the coordinate data by blending the coordinate data based on the first animation data AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data based on the second animation data AD2 and AD4 at a predetermined ratio is looped with the effect A character CH8. In a configuration different from that of the character B for performance CH9, an interpolated display period in which the coordinate data derived by combining is used is simultaneously started for the A character CH8 for loop performance and the B character CH9 for loop performance. may be configured. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously start the actions of the interpolation display period in terms of the appearance of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect character CH9 while dispersing the processing load.

<Another form of interpolation display period processing>
In the above embodiment, the end timing of the first animation period is predetermined, and the coordinate data of each vertex of each of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period is used to execute the loop effect. However, instead of this, the end timing of the first animation period can be varied, so that the vertices of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. The coordinate data may be configured to change each time the loop effect is executed. A specific configuration in which the coordinate data of each vertex can be changed in this way will be described in detail below.

In this embodiment, the operating device for effect operated by the player is electrically connected to the sound emission control device 60, and when the operating device for effect is operated during the execution of the first animation period, sound and light are generated. When specified by the side MPU 62, the corresponding command is transmitted to the display CPU 131, and when the display CPU 131 receives the command, the display CPU 131 terminates the first animation period, executes the interpolation display period, and then executes the second animation period. to start. For example, in game rounds that result in a loss, the first animation period occurs as a ready-to-win display effect in the production for game rounds, but the second animation period does not occur. When applied to a configuration in which a second animation period occurs after a first animation period as a ready-to-win display effect in a game effect, the timing at which the effect operation device is operated in the first animation period in the game cycle that results in a big win. , it is possible to change the start timing of the second animation period, which is a definite notification of the result of the big win. In this case, it is possible to perform the confirmation notification at the timing corresponding to the operation timing of the operating device for effect while using the loop effect.

In the configuration where the end timing of the first animation period can be changed as described above, the action mode of the loop effect A character CH8 and the action mode of the loop effect B character CH9 at the end time of the first animation period also fluctuate. obtain. Then, when the interpolation display period start timing is different between the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the action mode of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. It is preferable to change the target for starting the interpolated display period first according to .

Specifically, of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the change operation of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 between the end timing of the first animation period and the start timing of the second animation period. The amount of motion at one update timing in the interpolated display period is greater on the side with the greater amount of change than on the side with the smaller amount of change motion. In this case, it is preferable that the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9, which have a larger amount of change motion, have more image update timings in the interpolated display period. On the other hand, even if the interpolation display period start timing differs between the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9, the interpolation display period end timing is the same for the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9. Therefore, the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 whose end timing of the interpolated display period is later have fewer image update timings during the interpolated display period than the end timing of the interpolated display period which is earlier. Therefore, in this alternative embodiment, the interpolated display period is started first from the side of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that has the greater amount of change in relation to the end timing of the first animation period. .

As the data for determining the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the interpolated display period is to be started earlier in relation to the end timing of the first animation period, in this embodiment, the memory module 133 stores data for determining the first start target. A table PDT is stored in advance. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first start target determination table PDT.

The first start target determination table PDT contains the range of the number of frames that can occur in the first animation period (the number of image update timings), and the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are targets for starting the interpolated display period first. is determined in advance. The corresponding relationship is defined in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 as the action mode of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at each update timing of the first animation period and the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the start timing of the second animation period. is determined by comparing the operation mode of Specifically, the number of frames in the first animation period is the 0th frame (the frame at the start timing) to the 49th frame, the 100th frame to the 149th frame, and the 200th frame to the 249th frame. A loop effect B character CH9 is set as the character. On the other hand, for the 50th to 99th frames, the 150th to 199th frames, and the 250th to 299th frames (frames at the final timing) in the first animation period, the character on the first start side is looped. A performance A character CH8 is set.

A processing configuration for determining the target loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 whose interpolated display period is to be started first using the first start target determination table PDT will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart for explaining another form of the interpolation display period processing executed by the display CPU 72. FIG. Note that the processing for the interpolated display period is performed after the effect operation device is operated in the middle of the first animation period or after the final timing of the first animation period and until the end timing of the interpolated display period. This is executed each time the arithmetic processing for loop effects (FIG. 49) is started.

If it is the start timing of the interpolated display period (step S2701: YES), the first start target determination table PDT is read from the memory module 133, and the current number of frames in the first animation period is the first start side character. It is determined whether or not the frame number corresponds to the number of frames for the character CH8 (step S2702). If it corresponds to the number of frames in which the character on the first start side is A character CH8 for loop effect (step S2702: YES), the second animation data AD2 for character A is read from memory module 133 to work RAM 132 (step S2703). ). On the other hand, if it corresponds to the number of frames in which the character on the first start side is the B character CH9 for loop effect (step S2702: NO), the second animation data AD4 for the B character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 ( step S2704). When the process of step S2703 is executed or when the process of step S2704 is executed, the combination table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 in step S2705.

In subsequent step S2706, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. After that, in step S2707, update processing of coordinate data according to the combination table CT is executed for the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 which are to start the interpolated display period first. Also, in step S2708, for the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 which did not start the interpolated display period first, the same coordinate data as the coordinate data at the immediately preceding update timing is grasped. After that, in step S2709, update processing of other parameters is executed, and in step S2710, loop effect specifying information is stored. The processing contents of steps S2706 to S2710 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2504 to S2508 of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

If it is the next image update timing with respect to the interpolation display period start timing (step S2701: NO, step S2711: YES), the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that did not start the interpolation display period first. are read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2712). Specifically, if the process of step S2703 has been executed in the immediately preceding interpolation display period process, the second animation data AD4 for the B character is read, and the immediately preceding interpolation display period process is executed. If the process of step S2704 has been executed in the second time, the second animation data AD2 for the A character is read. After that, in step S2713, the combination table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. FIG.

In subsequent step S2714, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. After that, in step S2715, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2709, update processing of other parameters is executed, and in step S2710, loop effect specifying information is stored. The processing contents of steps S2709 to S2710 and steps S2714 to S2715 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2507 to S2508 and steps S2512 to S2513 of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment. . Further, the processing content when a negative determination is made in step S2711 is the same as the processing content when a negative determination is made in step S2509 of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

According to this embodiment, the types of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the interpolated display period is to be started first are determined according to the action mode of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. Since it is changed, it is possible not only to reduce the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period, but also to perform the interpolation display in a mode according to the end timing of the first animation period. Therefore, even if the end timing of the first animation period is variable, the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period is reduced while smoothly performing the interpolation display of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9. becomes possible.

In addition, since the type corresponding to the end timing of the first animation period of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 whose interpolation display period is to be started first is preset in the first start target determination table PDT, interpolation display is performed. It is possible to reduce the processing load when determining the types of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 whose periods are to be started first.

<Another Form of Interpolation Display Period Processing>
The type of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are targets for starting the interpolated display period first is not limited to the configuration in which the types of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are preset in the first start target determination table PDT. The end of the first animation period is determined from the coordinate data of the vertices of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing and the coordinate data of the vertices of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the start timing of the second animation period. The amount of motion of each of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 from the timing to the start timing of the second animation period is derived by calculation, and the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 having the greater amount of motion are first displayed during the interpolation display period. may be configured to start.

・Instead of starting the interpolated display period first from the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that have a large amount of movement from the end timing of the first animation period to the start timing of the second animation period, the movement amount is small. A configuration may be adopted in which the interpolated display period is started first from the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side.

<Configuration for performing bone model display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a bone model display rendering will be described. 55(a) and 55(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the bone model display.

Bone model display refers to displaying a bone display character CH10 representing a person or the like in 3D as shown in FIG. 55(a). Display content using skeleton data FRD1 including data BOD and a plurality of joint data JOD, and skin data SKD1 representing skin portions set in association with skeleton data FRD1. The bone data BOD corresponds to the bone portion of the bone display character CH10, and the joint data JOD corresponds to the joint portion connecting a plurality of bone data BOD. Therefore, by changing the coordinate data and orientation data of the bone data BOD with reference to the joint data JOD, the coordinate data of each vertex data TD in the skin data SKD1 set in association with the skeleton data FRD1 is changed. Accordingly, the form of the bone display character CH10 is changed. Note that part of the skin data is omitted in FIG. 55(b).

A parent-child relationship is set for a plurality of bone data BODs, and when the parent target bone data BOD moves, it follows the movement and follows the child target relationship with respect to the parent target bone data BOD. Certain bone data BOD will move. In the bone display character CH10, the bone data corresponding to the spine portion is set as the highest parent object in the bone data BOD of the main parent object, and the bone data BOD of the main parent object is set to the bone data BOD through the joint data JOD. All of the bone data BOD linked together correspond to the child target bone data BOD. Also, in the child target bone data BOD, among the bone data BODs aligned in a row from the main parent target bone data BOD, the bone data BOD on the side closer to the main parent target bone data BOD is on the far side. It becomes a parent object relationship to the bone data BOD. Therefore, when the main parent target bone data BOD is moved, the other bone data BOD are also moved according to the predetermined bone weighting data BWD1. Also, even if the main parent target bone data BOD does not move, if the bone data BOD that has a parent target relationship among a plurality of bone data BODs aligned in a row from the main parent target bone data BOD moves. Then, the bone data BOD, which is in a child object relationship with respect to it, also moves according to the predetermined bone weighting data BWD1.

The skin data SKD1 has a lot of vertex data TD, one polygon is defined by 3 or 4 pieces of vertex data TD, and the skin data SKD1 is expressed by a lot of polygons. Each vertex data TD is associated with one or more bone data BOD according to the skin weighting data SWD1. As a result, when the bone data BOD is moved, the coordinate data of each vertex data TD is changed according to the skin weighting data SWD1, the skin data SKD1 is accordingly deformed, and finally a mode corresponding to the motion of the bone data BOD is obtained. , the bone-displaying character CH10 moves, and the skin portion of the bone-displaying character CH10 is deformed.

In the bone model display effect, a plurality of bone display characters including the bone display character CH10 are displayed. A data configuration for executing the bone model display rendering will be described. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration for bone model display.

As shown in FIG. 56, the memory module 133 has an area for storing image data for displaying a bone model, each of a plurality of bone display characters including skeleton data FRD1 of a bone display character CH10. and a skin data storage area 161 prestored with skin data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including skin data SKD1 of bone display character CH10. An area 162 and a texture data storage area 163 are provided in which texture data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including texture data BTD1 of the bone display character CH10 are stored in advance. Skeletal data and skin data are as already explained. The texture data BTD1 is data that determines the color information of the bone display character CH10, and the color information is determined in relation to the vertex data of the skin data SKD1. Therefore, by applying the texture data BTD1 after applying the skin data SKD1 to the skeleton data FRD1, it is possible to display the bone display character CH10. These skeleton data FRD1, skin data SKD1 and texture data BTD1 are used by the VDP 135. FIG.

The memory module 133 stores in advance control data in addition to image data as data for displaying a bone model. As an area for storing the control data, a bone weighting data storage area 164 in which bone weighting data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the bone weighting data BWD1 of the bone display character CH10 is stored in advance. a skin weighting data storage area 165 in which skin weighting data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the skin weighting data SWD1 of the bone display character CH10 are stored in advance; and a bone animation of the bone display character CH10. A bone animation data storage area 166 is provided in which bone animation data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including data BAD1 are stored in advance.

The bone weighting data BWD1 defines the relationship between a parent object and a child object in a plurality of bone data BOD included in the skeleton data FRD1, and indicates the amount of movement when the parent object bone data BOD moves to the child object bone data BOD. Determine the ratio of the case where it is reflected against The skin weighting data SWD1 defines the correspondence relationship between the bone data BOD and each vertex data of the skin data SKD1, and defines the ratio of reflecting the amount of movement when the bone data BOD moves to each vertex data.

The bone animation data BAD1 is data that determines the coordinates of the bone data BOD at each update timing in order to cause the bone display character CH10 to perform a predetermined action over a plurality of update timings. A plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers in the bone animation data BAD1. Differential data is set. In this case, the bone data BOD to which the difference data is to be set is set only for some of the bone data BOD necessary to determine the rough movement of the bone display character CH10. For bone data BOD, coordinate data is determined according to bone weighting data BWD1. Also, even if the bone data BOD for which difference data is to be set is in a child target relationship with respect to other bone data BOD, not only the difference data determined by the bone animation data BAD1, The coordinate data is determined according to the coordinate data of the parent target bone data BOD and the bone weighting data BWD1.

Here, when displaying each bone display character CH10, the coordinate data of each bone data BOD of the corresponding skeleton data FRD1 is determined by calculation. A plurality of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 are set in the skeleton data FRD1 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 57(a). Specifically, fifty pieces of bone data, ie, first to fiftieth bone data BOD1 to BOD50, are set. Each of the bone display characters CH10 displayed in the bone model display rendering has a plurality of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 within a maximum range of 50 pieces. A coordinate calculation area 169 is provided in the work RAM 132 as an area for calculating the coordinate data of each of the bone data BOD1 to BOD50, as shown in FIG. The coordinate operation area 169 is provided with 50 unit operation areas corresponding to the maximum number of the bone data BOD1 to BOD50 of the bone display character CH10, and each unit operation area corresponds to the unit operation area. Addresses (1st to 50th addresses) are set.

A specific processing configuration for executing the bone model display rendering will be described below. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for bone model display effects executed by the display CPU 131 . Calculation processing for bone model display effects is executed in the calculation processing for effects in step S2209 in task processing (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for the bone model display effect is started when information about the bone model display effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is time to start the bone model display effect (step S2801: YES), control data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters to be displayed in the bone model display effect this time is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work. Read out to RAM 132 . Specifically, bone weighting data, skin weighting data, and bone animation data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters to be displayed are read out (step S2802). In the subsequent step S2803, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying each of the plurality of bone display characters is grasped. The image data includes skeleton data, skin data, and texture data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters. Thereafter, in step S2804, bone model display effect start designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that the bone model display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S2801 or if the process of step S2804 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2805). The image data includes skeleton data, skin data, and texture data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters.

Thereafter, in step S2806, a bone model number counter provided in the work RAM 132 is set to a value corresponding to the number of bone display characters to be displayed this time. In the following step S2807, a setting process to the unit bone number counter provided in the work RAM 132 is executed. In the setting process for the unit bone number counter, the number of bone data included in the skeleton data of the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter is set in the unit bone number counter.

Thereafter, in step S2808, each unit calculation area included in the coordinate calculation area 169 of the work RAM 132 is cleared to "0". In the next step S2809, the coordinate data set at the previous update timing of each bone data in the bone display character for which the current coordinate calculation is to be performed is read out from the area secured corresponding to the bone display character. , are set in the corresponding unit calculation areas of the coordinate calculation area 169 .

After that, coordinate calculation processing is executed in step S2810. Coordinate operation processing is executed for all bone data corresponding to the bone display character that is the target of coordinate operation this time. This is done in order from the bone data with the highest priority as the target. As a result, the coordinate data of the main parent target bone data is calculated first, then the coordinate data is calculated in order from the parent target bone data closer to the main parent target bone data, and finally the terminal child target , the coordinate data of the bone data is calculated.

The coordinate calculation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. If the bone data corresponding to the current value of the unit bone number counter is not the main parent target bone data (step S2901: NO), then in step S2902, bone data that is parent target relative to the current bone data. The coordinate data newly calculated for this update timing and the coordinate data set at the previous update timing (i.e., written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the current calculation target bone data in the coordinate calculation area 169 The current calculation target bone is calculated from the calculated difference data and the bone weighting data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. Difference data of coordinate data to be applied to the data is calculated. Then, the difference data is used as the coordinate data at the previous update timing of the current calculation target bone data (that is, the coordinate data written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the current calculation target bone data in the coordinate calculation area 169). ) to calculate new coordinate data. The calculated coordinate data is written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the current target bone data for calculation in the coordinate calculation area 169 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2901 or if the processing in step S2902 is executed, in step S2903, the current computation is applied to the bone animation data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. It is determined whether or not difference data is set for the target bone data. If the difference data is set (step S2903: YES), in step S2904, the difference data set in the bone animation data is converted to the unit corresponding to the current target bone data for calculation in the coordinate calculation area 169. It is applied to the coordinate data written in the calculation area, and the coordinate data after application is written in the unit calculation area.

Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for bone model display effects (FIG. 58), after the coordinate arithmetic processing is executed in step S2810, the value of the unit bone number counter in work RAM 132 is decremented by one in step S2811. If the value of the unit bone number counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more (step S2812: NO), coordinate operation processing (step S2810) is executed for the bone data corresponding to the current value of the unit bone number counter.

If the value of the unit bone number counter is "0" (step S2812: YES), it means that the coordinate operation processing of all bone data has been completed for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. do. In this case, coordinate data update processing is executed in step S2813. In the coordinate data update process, the coordinate data corresponding to the current update timing written in the unit calculation area of the coordinate calculation area 169 is made to correspond to the bone display character that is the current calculation target in the work RAM 132 . write to the reserved area.

In subsequent step S2814, coordinate calculation processing of the skin data is executed. In the skin data coordinate calculation process, while referring to the skin weighting data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter, it is made to correspond to the coordinate data of each bone data of the bone display character. Calculate the coordinate data of each vertex data of the skin data. Then, these coordinate data are written in an area in the work RAM 132 secured corresponding to the bone display character that is the object of the current calculation.

In the subsequent step S2815, parameter information other than the coordinate data of the bone data and the coordinate data of the skin data is calculated and derived for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. In the work RAM 132, the data is written in the area secured corresponding to the bone display character which is the target of the current calculation.

After that, in step S2816, the value of the bone model number counter in work RAM 132 is decremented by one. If the value of the bone model number counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more (step S2817: NO), the processing of steps S2807 to S2816 is executed for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. . If the value of the bone model number counter is "0" (step S2817: YES), in step S2818, bone model display effect designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is the execution period of the bone model display effect. It is stored in the register of the display CPU 131 .

When the arithmetic processing for the bone model display effect is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes a plurality of bone display characters to be displayed. The information of the use instruction of the corresponding skeleton data, skin data and texture data is set. In addition, parameter information to be applied to each image data is set in the drawing list, including coordinate data of bone data and coordinate data of each vertex data of skin data in each bone display character. In addition, information specifying bone model display effects is set in the drawing list, and information specifying the start of bone model display effects is set at the start timing of the bone model display effects.

Next, setting processing for bone model display effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The bone model display effect setting process is executed as part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when specifying information for bone model display rendering is set in the drawing list, setting processing for bone model display rendering is executed.

If information specifying the start of the bone model display effect is set in the current drawing list (step S3001: YES), the address information set in the drawing list is used to determine the current display target in the memory module 133. The address of the area where the skeleton data, skin data, and texture data corresponding to a plurality of bone display characters are stored is grasped, and based on the grasping result, these image data are transferred from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. Read out (step S3002).

If a negative determination is made in step S3001, or if the process in step S3002 is executed, in step S3003, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped. Further, in step S3004, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each bone data corresponding to each bone display character to be displayed is grasped from the current drawing list, and in step S3005, the coordinate data to be displayed is obtained. The coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each vertex data of the skin data corresponding to each bone display character is grasped from the current drawing list. Other parameter information about the character for is grasped from this drawing list. Then, in step S3007, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed according to the content corresponding to the grasped results in steps S3003 to S3006.

By executing the setting process for the bone model display rendering as described above, the skeleton data and skin data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters to be displayed this time are arranged in the world coordinate system. In addition, coordinate data derived using bone weighting data, skin weighting data, and bone animation data are applied as coordinate data of each bone data and skin data. As a result, on the display surface P, a moving image is displayed so that a plurality of bone display characters move.

<Description of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5>
Here, a collective character group CHG is set as one type of bone display characters. FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the collective character group CHG.

As shown in FIG. 61(a), the set character group CHG consists of a plurality of (specifically, five) set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. Each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 has, as shown in FIG. 61(b), set skeleton data FRD2 having a plurality of bone data ABD and a plurality of joint data AJD, set skin data SKD2, and set skin data SKD2. It is displayed using the texture data BTD2. Predetermined coordinate data is set by executing the arithmetic processing for bone model display rendering (FIG. 58) and the setting processing for bone model display rendering (FIG. 60) for each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. The set skin data SKD2 is applied to the set skeleton data FRD2, and the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are displayed in 3D in the world coordinate system as shown in FIG. 61(b). Then, by performing drawing while applying the set texture data BTD2 to it, image display of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 is performed on the display surface P as shown in FIG. 61(a). These data FRD2, SKD2 and BTD2 are stored in advance in the memory module 133 as shown in FIG.

All of the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are displayed in such a manner that the player recognizes them as characters having the same shape, pattern and size, as shown in FIG. 61(a). These group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are configured to perform specific actions around the bone display character CH10, for example, in a situation where the bone display character CH10 is displayed on the display surface P so as to perform a predetermined action. It is displayed on the display surface P. In this case, while the bone display character CH10 displays an action indicating the degree of expectation for giving a profit such as the result of a big win, the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 perform an action display indicating such an expectation for giving profit. can't break Then, when the bone model display effect is executed, the player will pay attention to the bone display character CH10. Under these circumstances, the bone display character CH10 requires fine movements, whereas the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 do not require fine movements. Therefore, the number of bone data ABD of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is set to be smaller than the number of bone data BOD of bone display character CH10. Ingenuity has been taken to reduce the amount of data and to reduce the processing load for displaying each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5.

The data configuration for displaying each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 will be described in detail below. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the skeleton data FRD2 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and FIGS. 63A to 63C show bone display character CH10 and set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for comparing each data amount;

As shown in FIG. 62, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, the number of bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2, and the number of bone data ABD21 to ABD30 of the third set unit character CHG3. number, the number of bone data ABD31 to ABD40 of the fourth set unit character CHG4, and the number of bone data ABD41 to ABD50 of the fifth set unit character CHG5 are all ten, and all of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 The number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is 50 in total. The bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one set skeleton data FRD2.

The total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is the same as the total number of bone data BOD of the bone display character CH10. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 63(a-1) and 63(a-2), only one bone display character CH10 is displayed by the skeleton data FRD1, and the first to fifth bone display characters CH10 are displayed by the set skeleton data FRD2. In spite of the fact that five characters, group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, can be displayed, the skeleton data FRD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10 and the group skeleton data for displaying the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. The amount of data is the same or substantially the same as that of FRD2. In this case, it is possible to reduce the data capacity compared to the configuration in which the same number of bone data as the bone display character CH10 is set corresponding to each of the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. Header data referenced by the VDP 135 accompanies each of the skeleton data FRD1 and FRD2. By aggregating as data FRD2, it is possible to reduce such accompanying data.

The number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is 50, and these bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are aggregated and set in one set skeleton data FRD2. 58), the coordinate data of each of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are collectively calculated in the same manner as the bone data of one bone display character.

Specifically, in the calculation processing for bone display effects (FIG. 58), as already explained, the coordinate data of each bone data is derived for calculation. The bone data are collectively read out and collectively processed (steps S2808 to S2813). In this calculation process, the coordinate calculation area 169 provided in the work RAM 132 is used. The number of calculation areas is fifty. On the other hand, the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one set skeleton data FRD2 as described above, and the total number of the bone data ABD1 to ADB50 is coordinate It is equal to or less than the total number of unit calculation areas in the calculation area 169 . Therefore, when calculating the coordinate data of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, it is possible to read out the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 at once and execute the calculation processing. Therefore, the data is read out individually for each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and after the calculation of the coordinate data of the bone data for one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is completed, the next one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is read. The processing load can be reduced compared to the configuration in which the coordinate data of the bone data is calculated.

In a configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one group skeleton data FRD2, the relationship between the parent target and child target of each bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is different. is set between Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is the same, and further, as shown in FIG. Since the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are arranged in the same manner, the skeletons of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 have the same shape and size. In this case, bone data ABD1 to ABD50 included in the same group G1 to G10 in FIG. 62 correspond to skeleton parts at the same position in each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. For example, the first bone data ABD1, the 11th bone data ABD11, the 21st bone data ABD21, the 31st bone data ABD31, and the 41st bone data ABD41 included in the first group G1 are represented in the corresponding set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. The tenth bone data ABD10, the twentieth bone data ABD20, the thirtieth bone data ABD30, the fortieth bone data ABD40, and the fiftieth bone data ABD50 included in the tenth group G10 correspond to the skeletal portion of the head, respectively. The set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 correspond to the skeletal portion of the right leg.

In each of the groups G1 to G10, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 are set in a parent-target relationship with respect to the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. there is For example, in the first group G1, the first bone data ABD1 of the first set unit character CHG1 is the 11th bone data ABD11, the 21st bone data ABD21, and the 31st bone data ABD31 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. and the 41st bone data ABD41 are set to a parent object relationship.

On the other hand, other than that, the relationship between the parent object and the child object both between the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the same set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 and between the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of different set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 is not set. For example, the relationship between the parent object and the child object is not set between the first to tenth bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1. Also, for example, between the 11th bone data ABD11, the 21st bone data ABD21, the 31st bone data ABD31, and the 41st bone data ABD41 of the 2nd to 5th set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 in the first group G1, the parent object and child object relationship has not been established.

In the configuration in which the relationship between the parent object and the child object is set as described above, the set bone weighting data BWD2 (see FIG. 56) stored in the memory module 133 is the bone data ABD1 of the first set unit character CHG1. ~When the difference data of the coordinate data is applied to any one of ABD10, other set unit characters CHG2 included in the same groups G1 to G10 as the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 to which the difference data is applied~ It is set to be directly applied to bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of CHG5. Therefore, the second through fifth group unit characters CHG2 through CHG5 follow the movement of the first group unit character CHG1.

On the other hand, since the relationship between the parent object and the child object is not set between the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first group unit character CHG1, one of the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first group unit character CHG1 has moved. However, other bone data ABD1 to ABD10 do not move following it. The same applies to the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. In addition, since the relationship between the parent object and the child object is not set between the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth group unit characters CHG2 to CHG5, for example, the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second group unit character CHG2 moves, the bone data ABD31 to ABD50 of the third to fifth set unit characters CHG3 to CHG5 do not move following it. As a matter of course, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 are in a parent-target relationship with respect to the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2. Even if the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 move, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 do not move following it.

See FIGS. 64 and 65 for the set bone animation data BAD2 for moving the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 and the action contents of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 when using the set bone animation data BAD2. I will explain while FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the group bone animation data BAD2, and FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the action contents of each of the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5.

As shown in FIG. 64, pointer information corresponding to one update timing of an image is set in set bone animation data BAD2, and difference data is set corresponding to each pointer information. Difference data is set only for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 for the pointer information "0" to "m". The difference data corresponds to data for moving in one direction while maintaining the shape of the first set unit character CHG1.

During the period in which the difference data is set, the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are displayed as moving images as shown in FIG. 65(a). Specifically, at the initial display positions of the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, as shown in FIG. They are evenly spaced in the direction. In this case, when the difference data set in the pointer information of "0" to "m" is applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, the difference data is applied to the second to second bone data as it is. Since this is applied to the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5, as shown in FIG. Moving.

Returning to the explanation of the set bone animation data BAD2 shown in FIG. Difference data are also set for the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth group unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. These difference data correspond to data for moving the first group unit character CHG1 in one direction while maintaining its shape, and for the second group unit character CHG2 and the fourth group unit character CHG4, the shape is maintained. It corresponds to data for moving in the direction opposite to the above-mentioned one direction, and corresponds to data for changing the shape of the third set-unit character CHG3 and the fifth set-unit character CHG5.

During the period in which the difference data is set, the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are displayed as moving images as shown in FIG. 65(b). Specifically, from the state in which the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are displayed as shown in FIG. 65(b-1), the first to fifth group unit characters are displayed as shown in FIG. 65(b-2). While moving in one direction as a whole of CHG1 to CHG5, the distance between the second set-unit character CHG2 and the third set-unit character CHG3 and the distance between the fourth set-unit character CHG4 and the fifth set-unit character CHG5 is shortened, the shapes of the third set-unit character CHG3 and the fifth set-unit character CHG5 are changed.

Next, the data amounts of the collective skin data SKD2 and the collective texture data BTD2 will be described.

Common set skin data SKD2 and common set texture data BTD2 are set for bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. That is, the set skin data SKD2 is set as data applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. Furthermore, the set skin data SKD2 is set as data applied to 10 bone data. When the set skin data SKD2 is applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, one set skin data SKD2 read from the memory module 133 is used as the first set skin data SKD2. This is applied to each of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the 1st to 5th set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5.

The coordinate data of each vertex data ATD of the collective skin data SKD2 for performing the application is determined by referring to the collective skin weighting data SWD2 stored in the memory module 133 . In the collective skin weighting data SWD2, the correspondence relationship between the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first collective unit character CHG1 and the collective skin data SKD2, and the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 and the collective skin data SKD2 of the second collective unit character CHG2. , the correspondence relationship between the bone data ABD21 to ABD30 of the third set unit character CHG3 and the set skin data SKD2, and the correspondence relationship between the bone data ABD31 to ABD40 of the fourth set unit character CHG4 and the set skin data SKD2. , and the bone data ABD41 to ABD50 of the fifth group unit character CHG5 and the group skin data SKD2.

In a configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the first group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated into one group skeleton data FRD2, the group skin data SKD2 is the bone data of one group unit character CHG1 to CHG5. As shown in FIGS. 63(b-1) and 63(b-2), the skin data SKD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10 is set as the data applied to ABD1 to ABD50. On the other hand, the collection skin data SKD2 has a data amount of 1/5.

Similarly, the set texture data BTD2 is set as data to be applied to one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. When the set texture data BTD2 is applied to display the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, one set texture data BTD2 read from the memory module 133 is used for the first to fifth set unit characters. It applies to each of CHG1 to CHG5. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 63(c-1) and 63(c-2), the set texture data BTD2 is 1/5 of the texture data BTD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10. amount of data.

In the operation processing for displaying the bone model (FIG. 58), when calculating the coordinate data of the bone data of a plurality of characters for displaying bones, the data corresponding to the bone data included in one skeleton data is subjected to the coordinate operation of the work RAM 132. After the coordinate data calculations for these bone data are completed, the bone data coordinate data calculations are performed for the next skeleton data. As a result, calculation of coordinate data is performed in units of one frame data, and various settings for calculating coordinate data of bone data included in one frame data are divided and executed multiple times. In comparison, the processing load can be reduced in that the number of times the processes in steps S2808 and S2809 are executed can be reduced.

For a plurality of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 that do not require fine movement control, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is reduced, and these bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are set to a single unit. It is collectively set in the set skeleton data FRD2. As a result, when calculating the coordinate data of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of a plurality of group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, it is possible to collectively perform the coordinate calculation of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50. It is possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which various settings for calculating coordinate data are performed each time.

In a configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are collectively set in one set skeleton data FRD2, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 are set in the second to fifth sets. It is set to have a parent object relationship with respect to the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. As a result, all of the first to fifth group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are moved integrally simply by setting the coordinate data for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first group unit character CHG1 in the group bone animation data BAD2. It is possible to Therefore, it is possible to integrally move the first to fifth group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 while suppressing the data amount of the group bone animation data BAD2. On the other hand, it is possible to adjust the coordinate data of the child target bone data ABD11 to ABD50 without affecting the coordinate data of the parent target bone data ABD1 to ABD10. As a result, all of the first to fifth group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 can be moved integrally just by setting the coordinate data for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first group unit character CHG1 as described above. However, it is possible to individually change the display positions of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5.

The group skin data SKD2 is set as data applied to one group unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and the same group skin data SKD2 is applied to each group unit character CHG1 to CHG5. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to store skin data in advance. Similarly, the set texture data BTD2 is set as data applied to one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and the same set texture data BTD2 is applied to each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. be. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to store texture data in advance.

<Another form of configuration related to bone model display effect>
The total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 may be less than or greater than the total number of bone data BOD of bone display character CH10. Further, the total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 may be smaller than the number of unit calculation areas of coordinate calculation area 169. FIG.

・Bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of one set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 may be configured to have a relationship between a parent object and a child object. In this case, it is possible to more realistically express the actions of the group unit characters CHG1 to CHG5.

- The relationship between the parent object and the child object may be set between the bone data included in the first skeleton data and the bone data included in the second skeleton data. In this case, when one of the character displayed by the first skeleton data and the character displayed by the second skeleton data is moved, the other character can be moved following the movement. .

The number and arrangement of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are not limited to the same for each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and at least one of the number and arrangement of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is different. However, a configuration in which the number and arrangement manner are substantially the same may be adopted.

The parameter information collectively calculated for a plurality of individual images after setting to the pre-derivation state in steps S2808 and S2809 in the arithmetic processing for bone model display effects (FIG. 58) in the display CPU 131 is the coordinate data of the skeleton data. but may be other parameter information such as rotation angle, scale, light information, and camera information.

<Configuration for performing plane shadow display>
Next, a configuration for performing plane shadow display will be described. 66(a) and 66(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the plane shadow display. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the memory module 133 necessary for plane shadow display.

66(a) and 66(b), the plane shadow display means that the effect character CH11, which is recognized by the player as a person having a face, body, hands and feet, is walking. This is the display content of displaying the shadow image CH12 of the effect character CH11 on the ground image BG representing the ground in a situation where the moving image is displayed. The display content of the shadow image CH12 changes according to the movement of the effect character CH11. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(a), when the effect character CH11 puts out its left arm forward and puts out its right arm behind, a shadow image CH12 having a corresponding shape is displayed. ), a shadow image CH12 having a shape corresponding thereto is displayed in the display content in which the performance character CH11 has its right arm forward and its left arm backward.

As image data for displaying the effect character CH11, as shown in FIG. 67, the memory module 133 stores in advance character object data COD and character texture data CTD. As image data for displaying the ground image BG, the memory module 133 stores ground object data BGD and ground texture data BGTD in advance. As image data for displaying the shadow image CH12, the memory module 133 stores in advance plane shadow plate object data BSD and plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2.

When displaying the shadow image CH12, in the world coordinate system, plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is combined with character object data COD for displaying the effect character CH11 and ground object data BGD for displaying the ground image BG. is placed between Planar shadow plate-like object data BSD is object data that is configured in a plane shape with no thickness and has a smaller number of polygons per unit display surface than a normal object having a thickness for displaying a character such as a person. be. Then, the shadow image CH12 is displayed by applying the planar shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 for displaying the shadow image CH12 to the planar shadow plate object data BSD.

The plane shadow plate object data BSD is arranged at a position separated above the ground object data BGD by a distance X (specifically, one pixel) in the world coordinate system. Character object data COD is arranged above object data BSD. By arranging the plane shadow plate object data BSD at a position above the ground object data BGD in this manner, the shadow image CH12 is reliably displayed above the ground image BG. A plurality of types of planar shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are set. Specifically, the first planar shadow texture data BST1 for displaying the shadow image CH12 having the shape shown in FIG. Second plane shadow texture data BST2 for displaying the shadow image CH12 having the shape shown in b) is set.

A specific processing configuration for executing plane shadow display will be described below. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for plane shadow display executed by the display CPU 131 . Arithmetic processing for plane shadow display is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S2209 in the task processing (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for plane shadow display is started when information about plane shadow display is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is time to start plane shadow display (step S3101: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of image data for plane shadow display is grasped (step S3102). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, planar shadow planar object data BSD, first planar shadow texture data BST1 and second Planar shadow texture data BST2 is included. Thereafter, in step S3103, plane shadow display start designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that plane shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S3101 or if the processing in step S3103 is executed, then in step S3104, based on the currently set execution target table, the ground object data BGD and the ground object data BGD and Grasp the texture data BGTD. Parameter information is calculated and derived from these ground object data BGD and ground texture data BGTD, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to these image data BGD and BGTD. (Step S3105). In this case, the coordinate data of each pixel of the ground object data BGD in the world coordinate system is updated so that the ground image BG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

In step S3106, character object data COD and character texture data CTD are grasped as data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. Parameter information is calculated and derived from these character object data COD and character texture data CTD, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to these image data COD and CTD. (Step S3107). In this case, the character CH11 is displayed as if it were moving alternately between the first display mode shown in FIG. 66(a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 66(b). The coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the object data COD is updated.

After that, in step S3108, based on the currently set execution target table, plane shadow plate object data BSD is grasped as data to be used this time. In the subsequent step S3109, it is determined whether or not the current update timing is the first shadow display period. The first shadow display period is a period in which the first planar shadow texture data BST1 is used as texture data for displaying the shadow image CH12. This is the period during which the second plane shadow texture data BST2 is used. If it is the first shadow display period (step S3109: YES), the first plane shadow texture data BST1 is grasped in step S3110, and if it is the second shadow display period (step S3109: NO), step S3111 The second plane shadow texture data BST2 is grasped.

The first shadow display period and the second shadow display period are used as image data for displaying the shadow image CH12 when the effect character CH11 is in the first display mode as shown in FIG. 66(a). To display the shadow image CH12 when the first planar shadow texture data BST1 corresponding to the first display mode is used and the effect character CH11 is in the second display mode as shown in FIG. The second plane shadow texture data BST2 corresponding to the second display mode is set to be used as the image data. That is, when the display mode is alternately switched between the first display mode and the second display mode when the effect character CH11 is displayed so as to move, the object to be used is displayed in accordance with the switching of the display mode. The plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are switched.

When the process of step S3110 or the process of step S3111 is performed, in step S3112, parameter information is obtained for the plane shadow plate object data BSD and the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 to be used this time. The parameters are calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in areas secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the image data BSD, BST1, and BST2. Thereafter, in step S3113, plane shadow display specification information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is the execution period of plane shadow display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

In this case, as the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of the planar shadow plate object data BSD, a shadow image CH12 can be displayed below the effect character CH11 as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b). As much as possible, the coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of the character object data COD grasped in step S3107 is grasped. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is the coordinate data for the ground grasped in step S3105 so that the plate-shaped object data for plane shadow BSD is arranged at a position away from the ground image BG by one pixel. It becomes the coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of the object data BGD.

Here, as already described, the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are applied to the plane shadow plate object data BSD, and the application position is determined using the UV coordinate data. More specifically, base UV coordinate data is set in plane shadow plate object data BSD, and UV coordinate data is set in plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2. Then, the color information of the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 is applied so that the UV coordinate data of the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 correspond to the base UV coordinate data of the plane shadow plate object data BSD. In this case, since the UV coordinate data is set as fixed data in the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2, the display CPU 131 cannot change the UV coordinate data. On the other hand, the base UV coordinate data of the flat shadow plate object data BSD can be changed by the display CPU 131, but the base UV coordinate data is not changed during the execution period of the plane shadow display. For example, the base UV coordinate data and the UV coordinate data are constant in both the first shadow display period and the second shadow display period. As a result, even if the effect character CH11 is displayed so as to move and the coordinate data of the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is changed accordingly, the plane shadow of each pixel of the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is displayed. The application target of the texture data BST1 and BST2 for the image is not changed.

When the arithmetic processing for plane shadow display is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, Information for instructing the use of the ground object data BGD, the ground texture data BGTD, and the planar shadow plate object data BSD is set, and if it is the first shadow display period, the instruction is given to use the first planar shadow texture data BST1. is set, and if it is during the second shadow display period, information for instructing the use of the second plane shadow texture data BST2 is set. Parameter information to be applied to each image data is set in the drawing list. Plane shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, and plane shadow display start designation information is set at the start timing of plane shadow display.

Next, setting processing for plane shadow display executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The plane shadow display setting process is executed as part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when plane shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for plane shadow display is executed.

If information specifying the start of plane shadow display is set in the current drawing list (step S3201: YES), the current display target in the memory module 133 is determined from the address information set in the drawing list. Addresses where various image data are stored are grasped, and various image data are read from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 based on the grasped result (step S3202). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, planar shadow planar object data BSD, first planar shadow texture data BST1 and second Planar shadow texture data BST2 is included.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201, or if the process of step S3202 is executed, then in step S3203 the ground object data BGD and ground texture data BGTD are grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. . In step S3204, the parameter information of the ground object data BGD and ground texture data BGTD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD is grasped.

Thereafter, in step S3205, character object data COD and character texture data CTD are grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. Also, in step S3206, the parameter information of the character object data COD and character texture data CTD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, the effect character CH11 is displayed as if it were moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 66(a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 66(b). Various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data COD is grasped.

After that, in step S3207, the plate-shaped object data BSD for plane shadow is grasped as data to be displayed based on the current rendering list. Also, in step S3208, the coordinate data of the plate-shaped object data BSD for plane shadow is grasped based on the current rendering list. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), the coordinates in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the planar shadow plate object data BSD for displaying the shadow image CH12 below the character CH11 for presentation are Make sense of your data. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is the coordinate data for the ground grasped in step S3204 so that the plate-shaped object data for plane shadow BSD is arranged at a position away from the ground image BG by one pixel. It becomes the coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of the object data BGD. Also, in step S3209, parameter information other than the coordinate data for the plate-shaped object data for plane shadow BSD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, the fixed base UV coordinate data to be applied to the planar shadow plate object data BSD is grasped based on the drawing list.

Thereafter, in step S3210, based on the current drawing list, the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 corresponding to the current shadow display period are grasped as data to be displayed. Also, in step S3211, the fixed UV coordinate data to be applied to the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are grasped from the texture data BST1 and BST2. Also, in step S3212, parameter information other than the UV coordinate data applied to the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 is grasped based on the current drawing list.

After that, in step S3213, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasped results in steps S3203 to S3212.

By executing the plane shadow display setting processing as described above, the ground object data BGD, the character object data COD, and the plane shadow plate object data BSD are arranged in the world coordinate system, and the display CPU 131 Various parameter information including the coordinate data derived by the calculation is applied to each of the object data BGD, COD and BSD. Corresponding texture data BGTD, CTD, BST1 and BST2 are applied to each of the object data BGD, COD and BSD. As a result, on the display surface P, as shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, a moving image is displayed as if the production character CH11 is walking and moving on the ground image BG. A moving image display is performed in which the shadow image CH12 follows the movement of the character CH11 while deforming.

When the shadow image CH12 is displayed so as to follow the effect character CH11 as described above, the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is arranged below the character object data COD, and the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is arranged below the character object data COD. In this configuration, plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are applied to data BSD. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the shadow image is displayed by calculation in relation to the light source data. Also, a configuration in which the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are directly applied to the ground object data BGD is also assumed. is moved to follow the performance character CH11, the relationship between the base UV coordinate data and the UV coordinate data becomes complicated. On the other hand, the position of plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is changed corresponding to the change of the position of character object data COD, and plane shadow texture data is added to the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD. By adopting a configuration that applies BST1 and BST2, it becomes possible to display the shadow image CH12 without causing such inconvenience.

In the configuration in which object data is provided separately from the ground object data BGD for displaying the shadow image CH12, the planar shadow plate object data BSD is thin planar shadow plate object data. It is BSD. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required for pre-storing the image data in the memory module 133 .

Planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is arranged at a position spaced upward by one pixel from ground object data BGD. This makes it possible to display the shadow image CH12 while preventing it from being buried in the ground image BG.

In the configuration for changing the shape of the shadow image CH12 in accordance with the change in the display mode of the performance character CH11, a plurality of planar shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are provided and used in correspondence with the display mode of the performance character CH11. The target plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are changed. This makes it possible to change the shape of the shadow image CH12 while reducing the processing load.

<Another Form of Configuration Related to Planar Shadow Display>
In the above-described embodiment, by changing the types of plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 applied to the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed according to the change in the display mode of the effect character CH11. However, in this alternative embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B, the type of plane shadow texture data BST3 applied to the plane shadow plate object data BSD is changed. Instead, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed by changing the shape of the planar shadow plate object data BSD.

A processing configuration for changing the shape of the shadow image CH12 by changing the shape of the planar shadow plate object data BSD will be described below. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for plane shadow display executed by the display CPU 131 in this alternative embodiment.

If it is time to start plane shadow display (step S3301: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of image data for plane shadow display is grasped (step S3302). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, planar shadow plate object data BSD, and planar shadow texture data BST3. Thereafter, in step S3303, plane shadow display start designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that plane shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S3301 or if the processing in step S3303 is executed, in step S3304, the ground object data BGD and the ground object data BGD and the Grasp the texture data BGTD. Parameter information is calculated and derived from these ground object data BGD and ground texture data BGTD, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to these image data BGD and BGTD. (Step S3305). In this case, the coordinate data of each pixel of the ground object data BGD in the world coordinate system is updated so that the ground image BG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

In step S3306, character object data COD and character texture data CTD are grasped as data to be used this time, based on the currently set execution target table. Parameter information is calculated and derived from these character object data COD and character texture data CTD, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to these image data COD and CTD. (Step S3307). In this case, the character CH11 is displayed as if it were moving alternately between the first display mode shown in FIG. 70(a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 70(b). The coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the object data COD is updated.

After that, in step S3308, based on the currently set execution target table, plane shadow plate object data BSD is grasped as data to be used this time. In the following step S3309, it is determined whether or not the current update timing is the first shadow display period. In the first shadow display period, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the shape of the shadow image CH12 is set to the planar shadow plate object data BSD so that it has the first shape mode corresponding to the first display mode of the effect character CH11. The second shadow display period is a period in which the first shape data is used as shape data to be applied, and the second shadow display period is a second shadow display period in which the shape of the shadow image CH12 corresponds to the second display mode of the effect character CH11, as shown in FIG. 70(b). This is a period in which the second shape data is used as the shape data to be applied to the plate-shaped object data BSD for planar shadow so as to have two shape modes. If it is the first shadow display period (step S3309: YES), the first shape data is grasped in step S3310, and if it is the second shadow display period (step S3309: NO), the second shape data Grasp. The shape data ascertained in step S3310 or step S3311 is written in an area in the work RAM 132 secured in association with the planar shadow plate object data BSD and the planar shadow texture data BST3.

When the process of step S3310 or the process of step S3311 is executed, in step S3312, based on the currently set execution target table, plane shadow texture data BST3 is grasped as data to be used this time. . After that, in step S3313, parameter information other than the shape data of the planar shadow plate object data BSD is calculated and derived from the plane shadow plate object data BSD and the plane shadow texture data BST3, and the derived parameter information is calculated. are written in the areas of the work RAM 132 secured corresponding to these image data BSD and BST3. Thereafter, in step S3314, planar display designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is the execution period of planar shadow display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

According to the above another embodiment, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed by changing the shape of the plate-shaped object data for plane shadow BSD instead of changing the type of texture data for plane shadow BST3. It is possible to change the shape of the shadow image CH12 in accordance with the display mode of the effect character CH11 while suppressing the data capacity required for pre-storing the planar shadow texture data BST3.

<Another Form of Configuration Related to Planar Shadow Display>
In a configuration in which plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are provided in association with each display mode of the production character CH11, a first display mode is used as a display mode when the production character CH11 is displayed so as to move. and the second display mode, a display mode corresponding to the operation path between these display modes may be present. In this case, the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. It becomes possible to correspond in detail to the aspect. On the other hand, the first plane shadow texture data BST1 is used for each display mode (including the first display mode) included in the first display mode group corresponding to the predetermined first operation period. The second plane shadow texture data BST2 may be used for each display mode (including the second display mode) included in the second display mode group corresponding to the operation period. In this case, it is possible to make the display mode of the shadow image CH12 correspond to the display mode of the effect character CH11 to some extent while suppressing the data capacity for pre-storing the planar shadow texture data BST1 and BST2.

In the configuration in which the shape data of the planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD are provided corresponding to each display mode of the production character CH11, the display mode in which the production character CH11 is displayed so as to move is the following: In addition to the 1st display mode and the 2nd display mode, there may be a display mode corresponding to an operation path between these display modes. In this case, the shape data of the plane shadow plate object data BSD may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. It becomes possible to correspond in detail to the aspect. On the other hand, the first shape data is used for each display mode (including the first display mode) included in the first display mode group corresponding to the predetermined first operation period, and the first shape data is used for the predetermined second operation period. The second shape data may be used for each display mode (including the second display mode) included in the second display mode group. In this case, it is possible to make the display mode of the shadow image CH12 correspond to the display mode of the effect character CH11 to some extent while suppressing the data capacity for pre-storing the shape data.

The object data provided separately from the ground object data BGD for displaying the shadow image CH12 is not limited to plate-shaped object data, and is configured in a three-dimensional shape with a thickness similar to the character object data COD. It is good also as the object data which were carried out.

The configuration for displaying the shadow image CH12 of the production character CH11 using the object data provided separately from the ground object data BGD is used to display a reflection image showing how the production character CH11 is reflected on the surface of the water. may be used to

<Configuration for step shadow display>
Next, a configuration for performing step shadow display will be described. FIG. 72(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the step shadow display, and FIG. 72(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the memory module 133 necessary for performing the step shadow display. be.

The step shadow display is, as shown in FIG. 72(a), a moving image in which the production character CH13, which is recognized by the player as representing a person having a face, a body, both hands and both legs, moves up the stairs. This is the display content of displaying the shadow image CH14 of the effect character CH13 with respect to the stair image SG representing the stairs in the situation where the display is being performed. In this case, the shadow image CH14 is displayed along the staircase shape. Specifically, the shadow image CH14 is displayed from one tread surface to the tread surface immediately below it, and the shadow image CH14 is stepped in correspondence with the fact that there is a step due to the rise between these tread surfaces. is displayed in

The display content of the shadow image CH14 changes according to the movement of the effect character CH13. Specifically, as the effect character CH13 climbs the stairs, the range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on one tread changes, and the type of tread to be displayed for the shadow image CH14 also changes. For example, in a situation where the shadow image CH14 is displayed in a stepped manner over two continuous treads and the riser connecting them, as the production character CH13 moves up the stairs, the lower side The range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the tread gradually decreases, and the range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the upper tread gradually increases. Then, the shadow image CH14 is displayed over the upper tread surface and the riser continuous to the tread surface, and then part of the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the upper tread surface.

As image data for displaying the effect character CH13, as shown in FIG. 72(b), the memory module 133 stores character object data COD1 and character texture data CTD1 in advance. As image data for displaying the stair image SG, the memory module 133 stores stair object data SGD and stair texture data SGTD in advance. As image data for displaying the shadow image CH14, the memory module 133 stores step shadow plate object data SSD and step shadow texture data SST in advance.

When displaying the shadow image CH14, in the world coordinate system, the step shadow plate object data SSD is combined with the character object data COD1 for displaying the effect character CH13 and the stair object data SGD for displaying the stair image SG. is placed between The plate-shaped object data for step shadows SSD is an object in which a planar object with no thickness is made step-like in accordance with the shape of a staircase. This object data has a smaller number of polygons per unit display surface. The step shadow plate object data SSD is set to a size smaller than that of the stair object data SGD, and is made to correspond to a part of the stair portion displayed by the stair image SG in which the shadow image CH14 can be displayed. is set. Then, the shadow image CH14 is displayed by applying the step shadow texture data SST to the step shadow plate object data SSD.

The step shadow plate object data SSD is arranged at a position separated above the staircase object data SGD by a predetermined distance (specifically, one pixel) in the world coordinate system. Character object data COD1 is arranged above the object data SSD. By arranging the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD at a position separated from the stair object data SGD in this way, the shadow image CH14 is reliably displayed above the stair image SG.

Only one type of step shadow texture data SST is set. When the shadow image CH14 is moved in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH13, the position where the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate object data SSD is adjusted in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH13. change. Specifically, when the predetermined color information of the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate object data SSD, the base UV coordinate data corresponding to the UV coordinate data set in the color information is set. By changing the base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate object data SSD according to the movement of the production character CH13, , the position to which the step shadow texture data SST is applied changes in the step shadow plate object data SSD. For example, for a pixel of step shadow plate object data SSD whose base UV coordinate data is set to (1, 1), step shadow texture data whose UV coordinate data is set to (1, 1) In the configuration to which the SST color information is applied, by changing the pixel for which the base UV coordinate data is set to (1, 1), the step shadow texture is applied to the step shadow plate object data SSD. The position where the data SST is applied will change. The base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD can be changed by the display CPU 131, but since the UV coordinate data is set as fixed data in the step shadow texture data SST, it is changed by the display CPU 131. I can't.

As data for changing the base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate object data SSD at each update timing of the image, UV coordinate animation data UAD is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as shown in FIG. 72(b). It is In the UV coordinate animation data UAD, the base UV coordinates of the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD are set in one-to-one correspondence with each update timing during the period in which the effect character CH13 is displayed as if it were moving on stairs. Data is set to change the data. The data for changing is to change the base UV coordinate data so that each pixel of the step shadow plate object data SSD is shifted by the same amount in a certain direction. This is the data of the value to be added. By using the UV coordinate animation data UAD, the base UV coordinate data of each pixel of the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD is shifted by the same amount in a certain direction at each update timing. By applying the step shadow texture data SST using constant UV coordinate data at each update timing, the shadow image CH14 is moved and displayed in a constant direction by the same amount at each update timing. Become.

A specific processing configuration for performing step shadow display will be described below. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for step shadow display executed by the display CPU 131 . The arithmetic processing for step shadow display is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S2209 in the task processing (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for step shadow display is started when information about step shadow display is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is the step shadow display start timing (step S3401: YES), the UV coordinate animation data UAD is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S3402). Also, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for step shadow display is grasped (step S3403). The image data includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, stair object data SGD, stair texture data SGTD, step shadow plate object data SSD, and step shadow texture data SST. Thereafter, in step S 3404 , step shadow display start designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that step shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131 .

If a negative determination is made in step S3401 or if the processing in step S3404 is executed, in step S3405, based on the currently set execution target table, the data to be used this time are the object data for stairs SGD and the data for stairs. Grasp the texture data SGTD. Parameter information is calculated and derived from these stair object data SGD and stair texture data SGTD, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to these image data SGD and SGTD. (Step S3406). In this case, the coordinate data of each pixel of the stair object data SGD in the world coordinate system is updated so that the stair image SG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

In step S3407, character object data COD1 and character texture data CTD1 are grasped as data to be used this time, based on the currently set execution target table. Parameter information is calculated and derived from these character object data COD1 and character texture data CTD1, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to these image data COD1 and CTD1. (Step S3408). In this case, the coordinate data of each pixel of the character object data COD1 in the world coordinate system is updated so that the animation of the performance character CH13 climbing the stairs is displayed (see FIG. 72(a)).

Thereafter, in step S3409, based on the currently set execution target table, step shadow plate object data SSD is grasped as data to be used this time. In the subsequent step S3410, the increment data of the base UV coordinate data corresponding to the current update timing is read from the UV coordinate animation data UAD already read into the work RAM 132, and the read data is used as the current base UV coordinate data. By adding, the base UV coordinate data corresponding to the update timing of this time is derived. Then, the derived base UV coordinate data is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the step shadow plate object data SSD.

Thereafter, in step S3411, step shadow texture data SST is grasped as data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. In the subsequent step S3412, the parameter information other than the base UV coordinate data in the step shadow plate object data SSD and the parameter information of the step shadow texture data SST are calculated and derived. Data are written in the areas secured corresponding to the data SSD and SST. After that, in step S 3413 , step shadow display specifying information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is the step shadow display execution period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131 .

In this case, as the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of the plate-shaped object data for step shadow SSD, the object data for the character grasped in step S3408 is used so that the shadow image CH12 can be displayed below the character for effect CH11. Coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of COD1 is grasped. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is the coordinate data for the stairs grasped in step S3406 so that the step shadow plate object data SSD is arranged at a position away from the stair image SG by one pixel. It becomes the coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of the object data SGD.

When the arithmetic processing for step shadow display is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, Information for instructing the use of the stair object data SGD, the stair texture data SGTD, the step shadow plate object data SSD, and the step shadow texture data SST is set. Parameter information to be applied to each image data is set in the drawing list. Step shadow display specification information is set in the drawing list, and step shadow display start specification information is set at the start timing of step shadow display.

Next, setting processing for step shadow display executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The step shadow display setting process is executed as part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when step shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for step shadow display is executed.

If step shadow display start designation information is set in the current drawing list (step S3501: YES), the current display target in the memory module 133 is determined from the address information set in the drawing list. Addresses of areas where various image data are stored are grasped, and various image data are read from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 based on the grasped result (step S3502). The image data includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, stair object data SGD, stair texture data SGTD, step shadow plate object data SSD, and step shadow texture data SST.

If a negative determination is made in step S3501, or if the process of step S3502 is executed, in step S3503, the stair object data SGD and the stair texture data SGTD are grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. . Also, in step S3504, the parameter information of the data SGD and SGTD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the stair object data SGD is grasped.

After that, in step S3505, character object data COD1 and character texture data CTD1 are grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. Also, in step S3506, the parameter information of the data COD1 and CTD1 is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data COD1 is set so that the animation of the performance character CH13 climbing the stairs is displayed (see FIG. 72(a)). grasp.

After that, in step S3507, the step shadow plate object data SSD is grasped as data to be displayed based on the current rendering list. Also, in step S3508, the base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate object data SSD is grasped based on the current drawing list, and in step S3509, other parameter information to be applied to the data SSD is grasped. In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the step shadow plate object data SSD for displaying the shadow image CH14 below the effect character CH13 is grasped. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is the coordinate data for the stairs grasped in step S3504 so that the step shadow plate object data SSD is arranged at a position away from the stair image SG by one pixel. It becomes the coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of the object data SGD.

Thereafter, in step S3510, the step shadow texture data SST is grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. In step S3511, the fixed UV coordinate data of the step shadow texture data SST is grasped from the texture data SST. Grasp based on.

After that, in step S3513, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed according to the content corresponding to the grasped result in steps S3503 to S3512.

By executing the step shadow display setting processing as described above, the stair object data SGD, the character object data COD1, and the step shadow plate object data SSD are arranged in the world coordinate system, and the display CPU 131 Various parameter information including the coordinate data derived by the calculation is applied to each of the object data SGD, COD1 and SSD. Corresponding texture data SGTD, CTD1 and SST are applied to each of the object data SGD, COD1 and SSD. As a result, on the display surface P, as shown in FIG. 72(a), a moving image is displayed in which the production character CH13 is moving on the stairs of the staircase image SG, and at the same time, the movement of the production character CH13 is synchronized with the movement of the production character CH13. Then, a moving image display is performed in which the shadow image CH14 follows the shape of the stairs while deforming.

In the configuration in which the effect character CH13 is displayed so as to move on the stairs as described above, the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD formed in accordance with the shape of the stairs. , the shadow image CH14 is displayed. This makes it possible to display the shadow image CH14 along the shape of the stairs.

By setting the step shadow plate object data SSD corresponding to the entire range in which the shadow image CH14 can be displayed on the stairs, and changing the base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate object data SSD, the shadow image CH14 can be displayed. By adopting a configuration in which the display position is changed, the data capacity required for storing the image data can be reduced compared to a configuration in which a plurality of types of step shadow plate object data corresponding to each display position of the shadow image CH14 are prepared. can be reduced.

Instead of applying the step shadow texture data SST to the stair object data SGD, the step shadow plate object data SSD is separately set and the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the base UV coordinate data. By changing , it is possible to prevent the display position of the stair texture data SGTD from being affected when the display position of the shadow image CH14 is changed.

<Another form of configuration related to step shadow display>
・The configuration for changing the display position of the image by changing the base UV coordinate data of the object data without changing the UV coordinate data of the texture is used to display the planar shadow image CH12 already described. good too. In this case, the size of the planar shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is not made to correspond to the entire ground object data BGD, but to a partial range in which the shadow image CH12 can be displayed in the ground object data BGD. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data volume of the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD.

If the UV coordinate data of the texture can be changed by the display CPU 131, the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the staircase object data SGD without using the step shadow plate object data SSD. may be In this case, after the stair texture data SGTD is applied to the stair object data SGD, the step shadow texture data SST is applied so as to overwrite the position corresponding to the UV coordinate data set in the display CPU 131 . According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity in that the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadow is not required, and the relationship with the UV coordinate data can be achieved without changing the base UV coordinate data of the object data. , it is possible to move and display the shadow image CH14 along the staircase shape.

The object data provided separately from the staircase object data SGD for displaying the shadow image CH14 is not limited to plate-shaped object data, and is configured in a three-dimensional shape with a thickness similar to the character object data COD1. It is good also as the object data which were carried out.

The configuration for displaying the shadow image CH14 of the production character CH13 using the object data provided separately from the stair object data SGD is used to display a reflection image showing how the production character CH13 is reflected on the surface of the water. may be used to

<Configuration for performing variable display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a variable display effect will be described. FIG. 75(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the variable display effect, and FIG. 75(b) is for explaining the configuration of the area in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 that is used when executing the variable display effect. is an explanatory diagram of .

The variable display effect means that, as shown in FIG. 75(a), the effect character CH15, which is recognized by the player as representing a person with a face, body, hands and feet, is moved and displayed in front of the player. This is an effect in which a plurality of symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are variably displayed. In addition, in the variable display effect, three types of the first symbol display portion CH16, the second symbol display portion CH17 and the third symbol display portion CH18 are variably displayed. It may be plural. Each of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18 has the same external shape, and each surface arranged in the direction of rotation is provided with an effect pattern. In one pattern display part CH16 to CH18, all the types of performance patterns arranged in the lap direction are different, while the types of performance patterns set in each of the pattern display parts CH16 to CH18 are the same.

The variable display effect is executed as promotion effect in the opening/closing execution mode. Promotion effects are effects that can occur both in the case of a normal jackpot result and in the case of a 15R high-probability jackpot result. Specifically, at the end of the effect for the game cycle, the combination of even-numbered symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is displayed in the final stop on the pattern display device 41, and the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode this time is displayed. In the case of the 15R high-accuracy jackpot result, a high-accuracy corresponding performance is performed during the opening and closing execution mode, and when the jackpot result that triggered the opening and closing execution mode this time was the normal jackpot result, it is in the opening and closing execution mode. It is a production in which a low probability corresponding production is performed. The variable display effect is started during the opening/closing execution mode, and if the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by the 15R high-accuracy jackpot result, the same effect pattern is displayed when the variable display of the plurality of pattern display parts CH16 to CH18 is stopped. are stop-displayed, and in an opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of a normal jackpot, the combination of the same performance pattern is not stop-displayed when the variable display of a plurality of pattern display parts CH16-CH18 is stopped.

When the variable display effect is executed, each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is translucently displayed for at least a predetermined period. In this case, each of the pattern display sections CH16 to CH18 is displayed as a three-dimensional image using the object data and texture data pre-stored in the memory module 133, but the object data may be translucent processed as it is. If this is applied, there is a risk that the image on the back side of the object data set as stereoscopic data will be seen through as it is. On the other hand, the object data for displaying the pattern display parts CH16 to CH18 is not subjected to translucent processing, but the pattern display parts CH16 to CH18 created separately from the production character CH15 are two-dimensionally drawn. By applying semi-transparency processing to the data and superimposing it on the two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the character CH15 for production, as shown in FIG. Translucent pattern display portions CH16 to CH18 are variably displayed.

In order to perform the display control, the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 stores a drawing buffer BF1, a first storage buffer BF2, a second storage buffer BF3, and a third storage buffer BF1, as shown in FIG. 75(b). A storage buffer BF4 and a fourth storage buffer BF5 are provided. Each of these buffers BF1 to BF5 has the same number of unit areas as the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142, and 1 byte is assigned to each color of RGB in each unit area. Therefore, drawing data similar to the drawing data drawn in the frame areas 142a and 142b can be drawn in the respective buffers BF1 to BF5. In each unit area, a 1-byte area for setting an α value is set in addition to the area for each RBG color.

The drawing buffer BF1 is used when drawing two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the performance character CH15 and two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. The first storage buffer BF2 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the effect character CH15 created using the drawing buffer BF1. The second storage buffer BF3 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the first pattern display portion CH16 created using the drawing buffer BF1. The third storage buffer BF4 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the second pattern display portion CH17 created using the drawing buffer BF1. The fourth storage buffer BF5 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the third pattern display portion CH18 created using the drawing buffer BF1.

A specific processing configuration for executing the variable display effect will be described below. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for variable display effects executed by the display CPU 131 . Arithmetic processing for the variable display effect is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S2209 in the task processing (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for the variable display effect is started when information about the variable display effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is time to start the variable display effect (step S3601: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the variable display effect is grasped (step S3602). The image data includes character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display portion CH16, and second It includes symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the symbol display portion CH17 and symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the third symbol display portion CH18. After that, in step S3603, the display CPU 131 stores, in the register of the display CPU 131, the variable display effect start designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that the variable display effect should be started.

If a negative determination is made in step S3601 or if the process of step S3603 is executed, then in step S3604, the effect character CH15 is displayed as data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. character object data and character texture data. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for these character object data and character texture data, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to these image data (step S3605). In this case, the coordinate data of each pixel of the character object data in the world coordinate system is updated so that the display content is such that the effect character CH15 is recognized as running toward the front side of the display surface P.

Further, in step S3606, as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution object table, each symbol object data and each symbol texture data for displaying each symbol display portion CH16 to CH18 are grasped. do. Then, parameter information is calculated and derived for each symbol object data and each symbol texture data, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to these image data (step S3607). ). In this case, each pixel of each symbol object data in the world coordinate system is displayed so that the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are recognized as rotating in a predetermined direction in front of the effect character CH15. Coordinate data is updated. Further, the α value applied to each symbol object data during the entire period of the variable display effect is set to opaque information that does not allow the image to be superimposed on the back side of the display surface P to pass through.

After that, in step S3608, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not it is a semi-transparent period in which each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 is displayed in a semi-transparent state. If it is the translucent period (step S3608: YES), in step S3609, translucency value data is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. Also, in step S3610, translucent designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is in the translucent period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S3608, or if the process of step S3610 is executed, then in step S3611, the variable display effect designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is the execution period of the variable display effect is sent to the display CPU 131. Store in a register.

When the calculation process for the variable display effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) contains the character object for displaying the effect character CH15. data and character texture data, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display portion CH16, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the second symbol display portion CH17 Then, information for instructing the use of the symbol object data and the symbol texture data for displaying the third symbol display portion CH18 is set. Parameter information to be applied to each image data is set in the drawing list. Further, in the drawing list, variable display effect designation information is set, and at the start timing of the variable display effect, the start designation information of the variable display effect is set, and during the translucent period, the translucent designation information is set. be. Furthermore, when translucent designation information is set, translucent value data is set in the drawing list.

Next, setting processing for variable display effects executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The variable display effect setting process is executed as part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the variable display effect specifying information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the variable display effect is executed.

If information specifying the start of the variable display effect is set in the current drawing list (step S3701: YES), the display target in the memory module 133 is determined from the address information set in the drawing list. Addresses where various image data are stored are grasped, and based on the grasped result, various image data are read out from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S3702). The image data includes character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display portion CH16, and second It includes symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the symbol display portion CH17 and symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the third symbol display portion CH18.

If a negative determination is made in step S3701, or if the process of step S3702 is executed, then in step S3703 character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15 are generated based on the current drawing list. Grasped as data to be displayed. Also, in step S3704, the parameter information of the image data is grasped based on the current rendering list. In this case, various parameter information, including coordinate data, is grasped so as to make the display content such that the effect character CH15 is recognized as running toward the front side of the display surface P.

After that, in step S3705, each pattern object data and each pattern texture data for displaying each pattern display portion CH16 to CH18 are grasped based on the current drawing list. Also, in step S3706, the parameter information of the image data is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information, including coordinate data, is grasped so that the display contents are recognized as that the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18 are circling in a predetermined direction in front of the performance character CH15. In addition, as the α value applied to each design object data, opacity information that does not allow an image to be superimposed on the back side of the display surface P to pass through is grasped.

After that, in step S3707, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed according to the content corresponding to the grasped results in steps S3703 to S3706. As a result, in the world coordinate system, the object data of the effect character CH15 and the first pattern are arranged in a positional relationship that enables creation of drawing data corresponding to the image for the variable display effect as shown in FIG. 75(a). The object data of the display portion CH16, the object data of the second pattern display portion CH17, and the object data of the third pattern display portion CH18 are set. That is, the object data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 are arranged in front of the object data of the effect character CH15, the object data of the first symbol display portion CH16 are arranged on the left, and the second symbol display portion is arranged in the center. The object data of CH17 is arranged, and the object data of the third pattern display portion CH18 is arranged on the right.

Next, drawing data creation processing for variable display effects executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The drawing data creation process for the variable display effect is the drawing data creation process for effects and patterns executed in step S2311 of the drawing process (FIG. 44) when the variable display effect designation information is set in the drawing list. is executed as part of the process of

79(a) to 79(c) and FIGS. 80(a) to 80(e) will be referred to as necessary in the following description. FIG. 79(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing data of the first pattern display portion CH16 stored in the second storage buffer BF3, and FIG. 79(b) is a drawing data stored in the third storage buffer BF4. FIG. 79(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing data of the second symbol display portion CH17, and FIG. 79(c) is an illustration for explaining the drawing data of the third symbol display portion CH18 saved in the fourth storage buffer BF5. It is an explanatory diagram. Also, FIGS. 80(a) to 80(e) are explanations for explaining how the drawing data of the variable display effect image is created using the drawing data saved in the respective saving buffers BF2 to BF5. It is a diagram.

First, in step S3801, the rendering buffer BF1 of the expansion buffer 141 is initialized. In the initialization process, each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 is initialized. As a result, 1-byte data corresponding to each color of RGB in each unit area is cleared to "0", and 1-byte data corresponding to the α value in each unit area is cleared to "0" so as to correspond to complete transparency. be done.

In the subsequent step S3802, rendering processing of the character for effect is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12 by masking the object data other than the object data corresponding to the production character CH15 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written in the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, the display object data for displaying the effect character CH15 is written in the unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the effect character CH15. The α value of each unit area where the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity, and the α value of each unit area where the display target data is not drawn is maintained at data corresponding to complete transparency. After that, in step S3803, a save process to the first save buffer BF2 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area in the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3802 is saved as it is in the first saving buffer BF2.

In the subsequent step S3804, the rendering buffer BF1 is initialized in the same manner as in step S3801. As a result, the 1-byte data corresponding to each color of RGB in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 is cleared to "0", and the 1-byte data corresponding to the α value in each unit area corresponds to complete transparency. is cleared to "0".

After that, in step S3805, drawing processing of the first symbol display section is executed. In the drawing process, by masking the object data other than the object data corresponding to the first pattern display portion CH16 in the world coordinate system, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12. Then, the drawing data after projection is written in the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79(a-1), the display object data for displaying the first symbol display portion CH16 is stored in the rendering buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the first symbol display portion CH16. Written in unit area. The α value of each unit area where the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity as shown in FIG. 79(a-2), and the α value of each unit area where the display target data is not drawn is The data corresponding to full transparency is maintained. After that, in step S3806, a save process to the second save buffer BF3 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area in the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3805 is saved as it is in the second saving buffer BF3.

In the subsequent step S3807, the rendering buffer BF1 is initialized in the same manner as in step S3801. As a result, 1-byte data corresponding to each color of RGB in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 is cleared to "0", and 1-byte data corresponding to the α value in each unit area corresponds to complete transparency. is cleared to "0".

After that, in step S3808, drawing processing of the second symbol display section is executed. In the drawing process, by masking the object data other than the object data corresponding to the second pattern display portion CH17 in the world coordinate system, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12. Then, the drawing data after projection is written in the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79(b-1), the display object data for displaying the second symbol display portion CH17 is stored in the rendering buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the second symbol display portion CH17. Written in unit area. The α value of each unit area where the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity as shown in FIG. 79(b-2), and the α value of each unit area where the display target data is not drawn is The data corresponding to full transparency is maintained. After that, in step S3809, save processing to the third save buffer BF4 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area in the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3808 is saved as it is in the third saving buffer BF4.

In the following step S3810, the rendering buffer BF1 is initialized in the same manner as in step S3801. As a result, the 1-byte data corresponding to each color of RGB in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 is cleared to "0", and the 1-byte data corresponding to the α value in each unit area corresponds to complete transparency. is cleared to "0".

After that, in step S3811, drawing processing of the third pattern display section is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC12 by masking the object data other than the object data corresponding to the third pattern display portion CH18 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written in the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79(c-1), the display object data for displaying the third symbol display portion CH18 is stored in the rendering buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the third symbol display portion CH18. Written in unit area. The α value of each unit area where the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity as shown in FIG. 79(c-2), and the α value of each unit area where the display target data is not drawn is The data corresponding to full transparency is preserved. After that, in step S3812, a save process to the fourth save buffer BF5 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area in the drawing buffer BF1 after the process of step S3811 is saved as it is in the fourth saving buffer BF5.

In the subsequent step S3813, the drawing data stored in the first storage buffer BF2 is written to the rendering and pattern buffers in the screen buffer 144. FIG. In this case, the display object data for displaying the effect character CH15 is written in the unit area of the effect and pattern buffer corresponding to the final display position of the effect character CH15. The α value of each unit area where the display target data is drawn is set to data corresponding to opacity, and the α value of each unit area where the display target data is not drawn is maintained at data corresponding to complete transparency.

After that, in step S3814, it is determined whether translucent designation information is set in the current drawing list. If translucent designation information is set, translucency value data is read from the current rendering list in step S3815.

If a negative determination is made in step S3814 or if the process of step S3815 is executed, then in step S3816 each drawing data stored in the second to fourth storage buffers BF3 to BF5 is displayed in the screen buffer 144. And write to buffer for design. In this case, the display target data for displaying the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 corresponding to each of the drawing data are buffers for effects and symbols corresponding to the respective display positions of the final symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. is written to the unit area of

Here, if the process of step S3815 has not been executed, the opaque α value is set for the corresponding display target data in each drawing data to be written, and other than the corresponding display target data is completely A transparent alpha value is set. Therefore, of the display target data for displaying the performance character CH15 that has already been written, the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 overlaps with the display target data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18. The display object data for the display character CH15 is overwritten, and the display object data for displaying the performance character CH15 is maintained as it is for the portions that do not overlap the display object data of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18. In addition, in the display target data of each of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18, the display target data of each of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18 is added with an opaque α value for portions that do not overlap with the display target data of the effect character CH15. is set by In each unit area of the effect and pattern buffer, a unit area in which neither the display object data of the effect character CH15 nor the display object data of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18 is written is set with a completely transparent α value. state.

On the other hand, if the process of step S3815 has been executed, a translucent α value (for example, “0.5”) is set for the corresponding display target data in each drawing data to be written, and the corresponding A completely transparent α value is set for data other than the data to be displayed. Therefore, of the display object data for displaying the performance character CH15 that has already been written, the portions overlapping the display object data of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18 are the former display object data and the latter display object data. A blending process is performed using the translucent α value. For example, let the color information of the former display target data in a predetermined unit area be "r10, g10, b10", let the color information of the latter display target data be "r20, g20, b20", and further, let the translucent α value be In the case of "α20",
R: r10×(1−α20)+r20×α20
G: g10 x (1-α20) + g20 x α20
B: b10×(1−α20)+b20×α20
becomes.

In addition, of the display object data for displaying the performance character CH15 that has already been written, the display object data for displaying the performance character CH15 is displayed for a portion that does not overlap with the display object data of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18. is maintained as is. In addition, in the display object data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18, the semi-transparent α value is added to the display object data of each of the symbol display portions CH16 to CH18 for portions that do not overlap with the display object data of the effect character CH15. is set as is. In each unit area of the effect and pattern buffer, a unit area in which none of the display object data of the effect character CH15 and the display object data of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18 is written is set to a completely transparent α value. state.

By executing the drawing data creation process, the drawing data stored in the first to fourth storage buffers BF2 to BF5 are synthesized as shown in FIGS. As shown in 80(e), an image for variable display effects is displayed. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 80(b) to 80(d), display object data for displaying each of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18 is created from the object data in which the opaque α value is set, and the display data is displayed. It is configured to superimpose the performance character CH15 on the display target data by setting a translucent α value for the target data. As a result, it is possible to display the pattern display sections CH16 to CH18 in a translucent state while preventing the phenomenon that the image on the back side of the object data, which should not be originally displayed, is seen through as it is. becomes.

By also using the drawing buffer BF1 as a buffer for separately creating the drawing data for the effect character CH15 and each of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18, there is no need to change the destination drawing buffer BF1 when creating the drawing data. Therefore, the process design can be simplified.

Prior to creating the drawing data of the effect character CH15 and the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18 in the drawing buffer BF1, the α value of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 is set to "0" corresponding to complete transparency. As a result, in the drawing data after being created in the drawing buffer BF1, the unit area other than the unit area for displaying the effect character CH15 and the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18 does not require post-processing, and the α value can be set to "0", which corresponds to complete transparency.

<Another form of the configuration related to the variable display effect>
・Although the data to be displayed for each of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18 for the drawing buffer BF1 is created individually, and the data to be displayed corresponding to each is stored in different storage buffers BF3 to BF5, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the display object data of each of the pattern display portions CH16 to CH18 may be collectively created in the drawing buffer BF1, and the collectively created display object data may be stored in one storage buffer. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the rendering buffer initialization process, the display target data creation process, and the display target data storage process are executed, thereby reducing the processing load.

The configuration is not limited to setting the same translucent value data for the drawing data separately stored in the second storage buffer BF3, the third storage buffer BF4, and the fourth storage buffer BF5. Translucent value data to be set may be changed for each drawing data.

<Configuration for Displaying Distorted Background>
Next, a configuration for performing distorted background display will be described. 81(a) and 81(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the distorted background display. FIGS. 82(a) to 82(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining image data for displaying a distorted background.

The distorted background display is a background image BGG that is displayed so that the player can recognize that there is no distortion as shown in FIG. 81(a-1). It is to display so that the player recognizes that there is distortion in the image. In this case, the distorted background display is performed so that the player recognizes that there is distortion in two of the X, Y, and Z axes (specifically, the X and Y axes).

For the background image BGG, background plate-shaped object data GSD and background texture data GTD1 pre-stored in the memory module 133 are used as shown in FIG. 82(a). The plate-shaped background object data GSD is object data that is configured in a planar shape with no thickness and has a smaller number of polygons per unit display surface than a normal object having a thickness for displaying a character such as a person. . Then, the background texture data GTD1 is applied to the background plate-shaped object data GSD set in the world coordinate system to create background drawing data, whereby the background image BGG can be displayed. Become.

The distorted background display is not performed by distorting the plate-shaped background object data GSD in the world coordinate system as shown in FIG. 81(a-2), but by adjusting the background texture data GTD1. done. Specifically, assuming that the background texture data GTD1 is set as color information as shown in FIG. By adjusting the color information so that the horizontal width of the color information is increased, the background image BGG is displayed so that the game ball recognizes that it is distorted as shown in FIG. 81(a-2). In this way, the distorted background display is performed by adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1, which is two-dimensional data, instead of distorting the three-dimensional background plate-shaped object data GSD. , the data to be adjusted when performing the distorted background display can be limited to two-dimensional data, and the processing load can be reduced.

The adjustment mode of the color information of the background texture data GTD1 for displaying the distorted background is set in texture data provided separately from the background texture data GTD1. As the texture data, first refraction texture data GTD2 and second refraction texture data GTD3 are stored in advance in the memory module 133 as shown in FIG. 82(a).

The number of pixels of the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 is the same as the number of pixels of the background texture data GTD1. There is a one-to-one correspondence with each pixel of GTD1. In each pixel of the background texture data GTD1, as shown in FIG. 82(b), a 1-byte area corresponding to each RGB color on a one-to-one basis is set. As shown in 82(c), a 1-byte area corresponding to each color of RGB on a one-to-one basis is set. In other words, although the contents set in each pixel are different for each of the texture data GTD1 to GTD3, the basic data configuration is the same for the background texture data GTD1 and the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3. there is

Data corresponding to each RGB color (hereinafter also referred to as R value, G value, and B value) set in each pixel of each refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 are not used as color information but are distorted. Used as degree information. Specifically, the R value is used as information on the degree of distortion along the X axis, the G value is used as information on the degree of distortion along the Y axis, and the B value is used as information on the degree of distortion along the Z axis. . However, the background image BGG is not distorted for all of the X, Y, and Z axes, but is distorted only for the X and Y axes, as already described. Therefore, in each pixel of the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, the R value and G value are set to distortion data, but the B value is set to constant data so that all bits are "0". It is

The first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 are such that the R value and G value of each pixel are set so that the adjustment mode of the color information of the background texture data GTD1 is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(a-2), the first texture data for refraction GTD2 is such that the background image BGG is recessed backward at the center in the horizontal direction and bulges forward at both left and right sides. On the other hand, the second texture data for refraction GTD3 has the center side in the horizontal direction bulging forward in the background image BGG and the left and right sides of the background image BGG bulging backward. The adjustment mode of the color information is set so that the player recognizes that it is recessed. With this configuration, the background image BGG is kept constant by alternately switching between the first texture data for refraction GTD2 and the second texture data for refraction GTD3 as texture data for refraction to be applied to the texture data for background GTD1. It is possible to perform a display that makes the player recognize that the pattern is wavy back and forth.

A specific processing configuration for displaying a distorted background will be described below. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for displaying a distorted background, which is executed by the display CPU 131 . Arithmetic processing for distorted background display is executed in the background arithmetic processing of step S2206 in the task processing (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for the distorted background display is started when information about the distorted background display is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is time to start displaying the distorted background (step S3901: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying the distorted background is grasped (step S3902). The image data includes background plate object data GSD, background texture data GTD1, first refraction texture data GTD2, and second refraction texture data GTD3. After that, in step S3903, distorted background display start designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that the distorted background display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901 or if the processing in step S3903 is executed, in steps S3904 and S3905, based on the currently set execution target table, the background plate-shaped object is used as data to be used this time. Data GSD and background texture data GTD1 are grasped. Parameter information is calculated and derived from these background plate-shaped object data GSD and background texture data GTD1, and the derived parameter information is stored in the work RAM 132 in an area secured corresponding to these image data GSD and GTD1. (step S3906). In this case, the shape data (that is, the relative positions of the pixels) of the background plate object data GSD in the world coordinate system are kept constant during the period in which the distorted background is displayed.

After that, in step S3907, it is determined whether or not the current update timing is the first distortion display period based on the currently set execution target table. The first distortion display period is a period in which the first refraction texture data GTD2 is used as refraction texture data, and the second distortion display period is a period in which the second refraction texture data GTD3 is used as refraction texture data. If it is the first distortion display period (step S3907: YES), the first refraction texture data GTD2 is grasped in step S3908, and if it is the second distortion display period (step S3907: NO), the 2 Grasp the refraction texture data GTD3. When the process of step S3908 or step S3909 is executed, in step S3910, distorted background display designation information for making the VDP 135 recognize that it is the execution period of the distorted background display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131 .

When the arithmetic processing for displaying the distorted background is executed as described above, the drawing list sent to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes the background plate object data GSD and the background texture data. Along with setting the usage instruction information for GTD1, the usage instruction information for the side of the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 that is currently used is also set. Parameter information to be applied to each image data is set in the drawing list. Further, distorted background display designation information is set in the drawing list, and further, distorted background display start designation information is set at the start timing of the distorted background display.

Next, setting processing for distorted background display executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The distorted background display setting process is executed as part of the background setting process executed in step S2302 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the distorted background display designation information is set in the drawing list, setting processing for distorted background display is executed.

If information specifying the start of the distorted background display is set in the current drawing list (step S4001: YES), the address information set in the drawing list indicates that the current display target in the memory module 133 is Addresses of areas where various image data are stored are grasped, and various image data are read from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 based on the grasped result (step S4002). The image data includes background plate object data GSD, background texture data GTD1, first refraction texture data GTD2, and second refraction texture data GTD3.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001, or if the process of step S4002 is executed, then in steps S4003 and S4004, the background plate object data GTD1 and the background texture data GTD1 are displayed based on the current rendering list. as the data of Also, in step S4005, the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 corresponding to the current distortion display period are grasped as data to be displayed based on the current rendering list. After that, in step S4006, the parameter information of the various image data is grasped.

In the following step S4007, a refraction application process is executed for applying the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 to be used this time to the background texture data GTD1.

In the refraction application process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 85, the background texture data GTD1 is first separately stored in the separate background storage area 141a provided in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S4101). As a result, in a situation where the background texture data GTD1 has already been read into the expansion buffer GTD1, the same data as the background texture data GTD1 is stored in the separate background storage area 141a. In the following description, the background texture data GTD1 read out from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 will be referred to as the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn, and the background texture data GTD1 written in the separate background storage area 141a will be referred to as the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn. The background texture data GTD1 is referred to as background texture data GTD1 to be separately stored. After that, in step S4102, the application counter provided in the register 153 of the VDP 135 is set to the same number as the total number of pixels of the background texture data GTD1.

In the subsequent step S4103, the R value and the G value are extracted from one pixel corresponding to the current application counter in the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 that are currently used. Then, in step S4104, calculation processing for refraction using the extracted R value and G value is executed.

In the calculation process for refraction, when the pixel corresponding to the current application counter value in the background texture data GTD1 is set as the reference pixel, it is determined how many consecutive pixels from the reference pixel are to be subjected to the blending process. data to be added and data determining with what kind of weighting the blending process should be performed on each pixel to be subjected to the blending process in relation to the distance from the reference pixel, extracted in step S4103. It is calculated from a predetermined arithmetic expression using the value and the G value. In this case, the pixels to be blended are limited to pixels aligned on one axis (specifically, the X axis in FIG. 81(a)) with respect to the reference pixel, does not include pixels aligned with the Z axis in FIG. 81(a). The calculation processing for refraction is performed by a calculation section 154 for refraction provided as a dedicated circuit in the VDP 135 . Also, as already explained, the R value is used as information on the degree of distortion along the X axis, and the G value is used as information on the degree of distortion along the Y axis, and each of the R value and G value is 1-byte data. Since it is a quantity, it can take values from 0 to 255. The refraction calculation unit 154 derives target pixel data for specifying pixels to be included as targets for blend processing based on the G value corresponding to the information on the degree of distortion on the Y axis, and the information on the degree of distortion on the X axis. Weighting data is derived to specify blending weighting relative to distance from the reference pixel based on the R value corresponding to .

After executing the calculation processing for refraction in step S4104, in step S4105, the color information of the pixel corresponding to the calculation result of the calculation processing for refraction in step S4104 is stored as another storage object using the target pixel data. is extracted from the background texture data GTD1. Then, each blend value corresponding to the weighting data is integrated with respect to the color information of each pixel, and the sum of the integrated values is calculated (step S4106). In this case, the blending process is individually performed for each RGB color of each pixel. After that, each value of RGB calculated in step S4106 is overwritten on the pixel corresponding to the current value of the application counter in the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn. As a result, the adjustment processing of the color information corresponding to the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 to be used is executed for the pixel of the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn corresponding to the current application counter value.

After that, in step S4108, 1 is subtracted from the value of the application counter of the register 153, and it is determined whether or not the value of the application counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4109). If the value of the application counter is 1 or more (step S4109: NO), the processing of steps S4103 to S4107 is executed for the pixel corresponding to the updated value of the application counter.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process for the distorted background display, after executing the refraction application process in step S4007, in step S4008, the world coordinate system is set according to the contents corresponding to the process results of steps S4003 to S4007. to run.

By executing the setting process for the distorted background display as described above, the plate-shaped object data for background GSD is arranged in the world coordinate system, and various parameter information derived by calculation in the display CPU 131 is used for the background. Applied to plate object data GSD. In addition, the background texture data GTD1 after color information adjustment processing has been executed using the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, which are currently used, is applied to the background plate-shaped object data GSD. . As a result, the background image BGG is displayed on the display surface P so that the player recognizes that the X-axis and the Y-axis are distorted.

Since the data for applying refraction is provided as texture data as described above, it is possible to use the data structure of the texture data as it is to produce a refraction effect on the image. In this case, since it is not necessary to store in the memory module 133 data having a dedicated data structure for causing refraction, data for applying refraction is handled in the same manner as reading other texture data. It becomes possible to read from the memory module 133 . For example, in the case of a dedicated data configuration for causing refraction, the processing contents for developing data in the development buffer 141 are different from texture data, but the By providing the data as texture data, it is possible to make the processing contents for the expansion the same as in the case of normal texture data. Therefore, simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

In a configuration in which data corresponding to RGB colors are set in the texture data, the refraction calculation unit 154 does not use all of the data, but uses only the R value and the G value as part of the data to obtain the background. Color information adjustment processing of the texture data GTD1 is executed. As a result, the processing can be simplified compared to the configuration using each data of RGB, and the time required for the adjustment processing of the color information of the background texture data GTD1 can be shortened.

Instead of distorting the background plate-shaped object data GSD, which is three-dimensional data, the distorted background display is performed by adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1, which is two-dimensional data. The data to be adjusted when displaying the background can be limited to two-dimensional data, and the processing load can be reduced.

<Another form of configuration related to distorted background display>
Instead of adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1 using the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 are used to adjust each pixel of the background plate object data GSD. The background plate object data GSD may be distorted by adjusting the coordinate data, resulting in a distorted background display.

A period during which the background texture data GTD1 is rendered as it is without applying the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 instead of applying the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 to the background texture data GTD1. may be set before or after the distorted background display period. In this case, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the background image BGG is distorted.

・Instead of deriving parameter information for refracting an image by using two values out of the R value, G value, and B value of texture data, one value or all values are used. The configuration may be such that the parameter information is derived.

- Instead of using texture data to derive parameter information for refracting an image, texture data may be used to derive other parameter information such as the transparency value of an image.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) When the sound and light side MPU 62 instructs the display CPU 72 to execute an effect, a command consisting of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 instructs the contents of the second stage effect. However, it may be configured to instruct whether or not to execute the second stage effect, and there are cases where the effect content is instructed and whether or not the second stage effect is executed. good too.

(2) One command consisting of first command data CD1, second command data CD2 and third command data CD3 is transmitted corresponding to each of a plurality of types of second stage content included in one effect. Instead of the configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which one command including command data corresponding to each of a plurality of types of content of the second stage included in one presentation is transmitted. Specifically, a command including one command data corresponding to the contents of the first stage effect and each command data corresponding to each contents of the second stage may be transmitted. Even in this case, it is preferable that the contents of each second stage are distinguished in units of bytes.

(3) One command consisting of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 is transmitted corresponding to each of the plurality of second stage contents included in one effect. In the configuration, when the first command data CD1 of each command transmitted until the end command is transmitted does not match, the display CPU 72 requests the sound and light side MPU 62 to retransmit the command, and the retransmission is requested. In that case, the same command may be sent again from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 . As a result, even if the command has been rewritten due to electrical noise, by resending the command, it is possible to accurately execute the effect and the notification.

(4) One command consisting of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 is transmitted corresponding to each of the plurality of second stage contents included in one effect. In the configuration, the start command may be transmitted before multiple types of commands corresponding to one effect are transmitted. This makes it possible for the display CPU 72 to clearly grasp whether or not a command corresponding to one effect is being transmitted.

(5) V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) even during execution of the background calculation processing of step S906, the effect calculation processing of step S909, and the design calculation processing of step S912 included in the task processing (FIG. 19) A new processing cycle may be started. In this case, the task processing may be restarted from the middle of the interrupted arithmetic processing in the next processing of the V interrupt processing, or the task processing may be restarted from the beginning of the interrupted arithmetic processing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to early start a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing.

(6) When the display CPU 72 has read the execution object table for notification as an object to be executed, a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is started during the execution of the task processing (FIG. 19). Even so, the task processing may be executed using information corresponding to the new pointer information in the execution target table instead of restarting the processing from the middle of the interruption in the next execution of the task processing. This makes it possible to give priority to the progress of the content of the notification.

(7) When a new V interrupt process (FIG. 15) is started during the execution of the task process (FIG. 19) and the process is resumed from the interrupted process in the next execution of the task process. Although the delay command is transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the sound and light side MPU 62, the sound and light side MPU 62 adjusts the pointer information of the control pattern table, but the adjustment may not be performed.

(8) In the second embodiment, the cameras (viewpoints) are individually set for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system. A single camera may be set in common for image data.

(9) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of the background image, effect image, and pattern image. may be projected together, may be configured to be projected collectively in units of effect images and symbol images, or may be configured to be collectively projected.

(10) In the second embodiment, when the color information setting process (step S2309) is performed, the configuration may be such that the color information is set such that the texture is applied only to the surface to be projected. In this case, the processing load of rendering can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, the configuration may be such that color information such as texture mapping is set after projection. In this case, upon projection, the coordinate information of each pixel forming the projection plane is stored, and color information such as texture mapping is set based on the coordinate information.

(11) Display control based on a command sent from the main controller 50 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 90 is controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on the command sent from the main controller 50 The device 90 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 60 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main controller 50 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into the main controller 50 . Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are arbitrary.

(12) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reels is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P);
Display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display section using generated data (drawing data) generated by data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation section 151 and rendering section 152);
with
The data generation means includes information derivation means (function for executing the processing of steps S2807 to S2815 in the display CPU 131) for deriving control information (coordinate data) used to generate the generation data,
The information derivation means is
Pre-derivation setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S2808 and S2809 in the display CPU 131) for setting the derivation storage means (coordinate calculation area 169) to the pre-derivation state;
Derivation execution means (function for executing the processing of step S2810 in the display CPU 131) for deriving the control information using the derivation storage means set to the pre-derivation state;
The setting to the pre-derivation state by the pre-derivation setting means is a configuration that can be executed multiple times to generate the generated data at the update timing of one image,
The derivation execution means sets the pre-derivation state by the pre-derivation setting means and before the pre-derivation state is newly set. to CHG5) for deriving the control information (a function of executing the process of step S2810 of the display CPU 131 when deriving the coordinate data for the set skeleton data FRD2). Amusement machine.

According to feature A1, by generating generation data for image display using control information, it is possible to change the content of the generation data by changing the control information, thereby diversifying the display mode of the image. It becomes possible to Further, when deriving the control information, the derivation storage means is used, and the control information derivation is started after the derivation storage means is set to the pre-derivation state, thereby deriving the control information favorably. It becomes possible.

In this case, the control information corresponding to the plurality of types of individual images is derived after the pre-derivation state is set in the derivation storage means and before the pre-derivation state is newly set. be done. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the control information compared to a configuration in which the pre-derivation state is set for each individual image. Therefore, display control can be preferably performed.

Feature A2. The pre-derivation setting means, after initializing the derivation storage means, sets pre-derivation information about an individual image from which the control information is to be derived in the post-initialization derivation storage means. The game machine according to feature A1, characterized in that the storage means for use is set to the pre-derivation state.

According to feature A2, when the control information is derived, the control information can be appropriately derived by initializing the derivation storage means and setting the pre-derivation information. In this case, after the pre-derivation state is set and before the pre-derivation state is newly set, the control information is derived for the plurality of types of individual images. It is possible to reduce the number of times of initialization and setting of pre-derivation information, and it is possible to reduce the processing load for deriving control information.

Feature A3. The data generating means uses one piece of image data (set skeleton data FRD2) to display the plurality of types of individual images from which the control information is collectively derived by the plurality of correspondence deriving means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized by:

According to the feature A3, since a plurality of types of individual images are displayed by one image data, the collectively derived control information is not applied to a plurality of image data, but is applied to the one image data. Just do it. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing for specifying the image data to which the control information is applied.

Feature A4. The data generating means generates reference data (skeletal data FRD1 , set skeleton data FRD2), deformation data (skin data SKD1, set skin data SKD2) to be deformed according to the reference data, and color data (texture data BTD1 , set texture data BTD2), and
Each of the plurality of types of individual images from which the control information is collectively derived by the plurality of correspondence deriving means is an image that can be displayed by using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data. can be,
Any one of the features A1 to A3, wherein the control information changes the contents of the reference data corresponding to the plurality of types of individual images so that the operation modes of the plurality of types of individual images are changed. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature A4, since the moving image display of multiple types of individual images is performed using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data, it is possible to realistically express the moving image display of the multiple types of individual images. becomes. In this case, since the control information for changing the content of the reference data is collectively derived for a plurality of types of individual images, even if the configuration uses the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data, the processing load is extremely high. It becomes possible to prevent it from becoming too high.

Feature A5. The data generation means is configured to use the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data when generating generation data for displaying an image in which a specific individual image (bone display character CH10) moves. ,
The feature A4, wherein the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images is equal to or less than the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the specific individual image. The game machine described.

According to the feature A5, even when a plurality of types of individual images are displayed simultaneously using the reference data, deformation data, and color data, the total data of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images. Since the capacity is less than the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying a specific individual image, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be processed regarding the derivation of control information and the application of the derived control information. It becomes possible to reduce the load.

Feature A6. The reference data has a plurality of unit reference data (bone data BOD1 to BOD50, ABD1 to ABD50), and by changing the relative positional relationship of the plurality of unit reference data, individual A configuration in which the operation mode of the image is changed,
the plurality of unit reference data have a data relationship set such that when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed accordingly;
Characteristic A4, wherein the unit reference data corresponding to the sub-individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set to have a sub-unit reference data relationship with respect to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image; or The gaming machine described in A5.

According to feature A6, when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub-unit reference data is changed, so that the operation mode of one individual image is determined by one reference data. In , it is possible to more realistically express the operation mode of the individual image. In this case, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub-individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set to have a sub-unit reference data relationship with respect to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. As a result, when moving the main individual image and the sub individual image together, position data for the main unit reference data can be obtained by utilizing the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data in the reference data. It is sufficient to adjust the control information to change .

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the position data of the sub unit reference data can be changed without affecting the position data of the main unit reference data.

According to feature A7, even in a configuration in which the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data is set for the main individual image and the sub individual image, the sub individual image is generated independently of the main individual image. It is possible to operate.

Feature A8. The unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image and the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image are in one-to-one correspondence, and between the corresponding unit reference data, the unit reference data of the main individual image is the main unit reference data. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7, wherein the data relationship is set so that the unit reference data and the unit reference data of the sub individual image become the sub unit reference data.

According to feature A8, it is possible to associate main individual images and sub-individual images in detail in units of unit reference data.

Feature A9. The main individual image and the sub individual image have the same or substantially the same number and arrangement of unit reference data,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8, wherein at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image.

According to feature A9, since at least one of deformation data and color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image, it is possible to reduce the data capacity required to store various data.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A9, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F5, features G1 to G7 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P);
Display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display section using generated data (drawing data) generated by data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation section 151 and rendering section 152);
with
When generating data for displaying an image in which an individual image moves, the data generation means is data set corresponding to the individual image and serving as a reference for movement (set skeleton). data FRD2), deformation data (collective skin data SKD2) that is deformed according to the reference data, and color data (collective texture data BTD2) in which color information to be applied to the deformation data is defined. is a possible configuration,
The reference data has a plurality of unit reference data (bone data ABD1 to ABD50), and the operation mode of the individual image corresponding to the reference data by changing the relative positional relationship of the plurality of unit reference data. is the configuration to be changed, and
the plurality of unit reference data have a data relationship set such that when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed accordingly;
Of the multiple types of individual images, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub-individual images (second to fifth group unit characters CHG2 to CHG5) are compared to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image (first group unit character CHG1). and is set in the relationship of the sub-unit reference data.

According to the feature B1, when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed, so that the operation mode of one individual image is determined by one reference data. In , it is possible to more realistically express the operation mode of the individual image. In this case, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub-individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set to have a sub-unit reference data relationship with respect to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. As a result, when moving the main individual image and the sub individual image together, position data for the main unit reference data can be obtained by utilizing the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data in the reference data. It is sufficient to adjust the control information to change .

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the position data of the sub unit reference data can be changed without affecting the position data of the main unit reference data.

According to feature B2, even in a configuration in which the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data is set for the main individual image and the sub individual image, the sub individual image is generated independently of the main individual image. It is possible to operate.

Feature B3. The unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image and the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image are in one-to-one correspondence, and between the corresponding unit reference data, the unit reference data of the main individual image is the main unit reference data. The game machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the data relationship is set so that the unit reference data and the unit reference data of the sub-individual image become the sub-unit reference data.

According to feature B3, it is possible to associate the main individual image and the sub individual image in detail in units of unit reference data.

Feature B4. The main individual image and the sub individual image have the same or substantially the same number and arrangement of unit reference data,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image.

According to the feature B4, at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image, so it is possible to reduce the data capacity required for storing various data.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the unit reference data corresponding to each of the plurality of types of individual images is included in one reference data.

According to the feature B5, since the unit reference data corresponding to each of the plurality of types of individual images are aggregated into one reference data, the processing load for the processing for reading the reference data and the processing for using the reference data is reduced. It becomes possible to

Feature B6. The data generation means is configured to use the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data when generating generation data for displaying an image in which a specific individual image (bone display character CH10) moves. ,
Characteristic features B1 to B1, wherein the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images is equal to or less than the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the specific individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of B5.

According to the feature B6, even when a plurality of types of individual images are displayed simultaneously using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data, the total data of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images. Since the capacity is less than or equal to the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying a specific individual image, the amount of data subject to the derivation of information for controlling the reference data and the application of the derived information is suppressed. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load.

For the configuration of any one of the features B1 to B6, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F5, features G1 to G7 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Layout means for arranging object data, which is 3D information, in the virtual 3D space (function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in the VDP 135); ), projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating generation data (rendering data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane. Generated data for storing generated data generated by data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151 and rendering unit 152) having drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S2310 to S2312 in VDP 135) storage means (frame buffer 142);
Display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on display means (symbol display device 41);
In a game machine equipped with
The arranging means arranges corresponding images (shadow images CH12, CH14), which are either shadow images or reflection images of the first individual images (drawing characters CH11, CH13), with second individual images (ground image BG, staircase image). SG), corresponding object data (planar shadow plate object data BSD, step shadow plate object data SSD), which is object data for displaying the corresponding image. are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space separately from object data (ground object data BGD, stair object data SGD) for displaying the second individual image.

According to the feature C1, the corresponding object data, which is the object data for displaying the corresponding image, is set separately from the object data for displaying the second individual image, thereby displaying the second individual image. Data setting for displaying the corresponding image can be performed independently of the data setting of . As a result, even when the corresponding image, which is one of the shadow image and the reflection image of the first individual image, is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the second individual image, the display content of the corresponding image and the Therefore, it is possible to set data for displaying the second individual image regardless of the image, thereby facilitating the design for displaying these images. Therefore, display control can be preferably performed.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the corresponding object data is a plate-shaped polygon.

According to feature C2, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described while suppressing an increase in the data capacity required for storing object data.

Feature C3. Characteristic feature C1 or C2, wherein the arranging means arranges the corresponding object data so as to be spaced from the object data for displaying the second individual image on the side where the display position is in front of the object data. game machine.

According to feature C3, in the virtual three-dimensional space, the corresponding object data is not arranged overlapping with the object data for displaying the second individual image, but is arranged so as to be spaced from the display position toward the front. Therefore, it is possible to superimpose the corresponding image on the second individual image and display it while using the configuration for determining the image to be displayed in relation to the arrangement position in the virtual three-dimensional space.

Feature C4. When the position of the object data for displaying the first individual image in the virtual three-dimensional space is changed, the data generating means changes the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space accordingly. (a function of executing the processing of steps S3112 and S3313 in the display CPU 131).

According to the feature C4, by simply changing the display position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space, it is possible to move and display the corresponding image following the moving display of the first individual image.

Feature C5. The data generating means includes texture setting means (function for executing the processing of step S2309 in the VDP 135) for setting texture data for the object data,
When the display mode of the first individual image is the first display mode, the texture setting means sets first corresponding texture data (first plane shadow texture data BST1) as texture data for displaying the corresponding image. When it is set in the corresponding object data and the display mode of the second individual image is the second display mode, the second corresponding texture data (second plane shadow texture data BST2) is used as the texture data for displaying the corresponding image. ) is set as the corresponding object data.

According to feature C5, it is possible to match the display mode of the corresponding image with the display mode of the first individual image simply by switching the texture data set in the corresponding object data.

Feature C6. When the display mode of the first individual image is the first display mode, the data generating means displays the first individual image by using the first shape data as shape data for determining the shape of the corresponding object data. When the mode is the second display mode, means for using the second shape data as shape data for determining the shape of the corresponding object data (function for executing the processing of steps S3309 to S3311 in the display CPU 131) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized by:

According to the feature C6, by changing the shape data used for the corresponding object data, it is possible to match the display mode of the corresponding image with the display mode of the first individual image.

Feature C7. The data generating means includes texture setting means (function for executing the processing of step S2309 in the VDP 135) for setting texture data for the object data,
When the display position of the first individual image is changed, the texture setting means sets the correspondence of the texture data for displaying the corresponding image in a situation where the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is not changed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6, further comprising setting position changing means (a function of executing the processing of step S3410 in the display CPU 131) for changing the setting position relationship with respect to the object data.

According to feature C7, the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is changed by causing the corresponding image to follow the moving display of the first individual image by changing the set positional relationship of the texture data with respect to the corresponding object data. It is possible to move and display the corresponding image even in a situation in which it is not preferable.

Feature C8. The shape data of the corresponding object data is set so as to correspond to the shape data of the object data for displaying the second individual image corresponding to the area in which the corresponding image is superimposed and displayed in the second individual image. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that

According to feature C8, since the corresponding object data is set in correspondence with the shape of the object data for displaying the second individual image, even if the corresponding image is displayed using the corresponding object data, It is possible to suitably superimpose the corresponding image on the second individual image.

Further, by applying the configuration limited by the feature C7 to the configuration of the feature C8, the moving display of the corresponding image is performed by changing the setting positional relationship of the texture data with respect to the corresponding object data. It is possible to move and display the corresponding image without complicatedly moving the corresponding object data set corresponding to the shape of the object data for displaying the .

For the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C8, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F5, features G1 to G7 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P);
display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
with
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data (base moving image data BMD) used for reproducing moving images,
The display control means is
Developing means for developing the moving image data in the developing area (developing buffer 81) and creating still image data for a plurality of update timings for the image corresponding to the moving image data (the process of step S1303 in the VDP 76 is the function to be performed, the video decoder 93);
By using the still image data for a plurality of update timings developed by the development means in the order determined in the moving image data, a moving image corresponding to the moving image data (color change effect character CH1 ) (the function of executing the processing of step S1206 in the display CPU 72, the function of executing the processing of step S1306 in the VDP 76),
By reading additional image data (first to n-th parts image data PD1 to PD3) from the display storage means and using the additional image data when using the still image data, the additional image data can be handled. additional execution means (function of executing the process of step S1206 in the display CPU 72, function of executing the process of step S1307 in the VDP 76) for adding an additional individual image (color change target area CR) to the moving image corresponding image;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D1, when displaying an image at one update timing, not only the still image data obtained by expanding the moving image data but also the additional image data are used to display the moving image. It is configured to additionally display an additional individual image to an image. As a result, for example, even if it becomes necessary to change a part of the moving image corresponding image, the moving image data can be used as it is by using the additional image data to cope with the partial change. It becomes possible. In addition, for example, even if a plurality of types of moving images with partially different contents of the moving image corresponding images are required, by using the additional image data to change the contents of the part, it is possible to reproduce the moving image data. There is no need to prepare multiple types. Therefore, display control can be preferably performed.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the additional image data can be used at a plurality of update timings so that the additional individual image can be changed at a plurality of update timings.

According to the feature D2, the configuration is such that different additional image data can be used at a plurality of update timings, so that the content of the additional individual image can be changed in accordance with the content of the moving image corresponding image.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the additional image data corresponding to each of the still image data corresponding to the plurality of update timings can be used.

According to feature D3, it is possible to display an additional individual image corresponding to the content of the moving image corresponding to the entire display period of the moving image corresponding to the moving image.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D2 or D3, wherein the additional image data for a plurality of update timings are pre-stored in the display storage means without being compressed as moving image data.

According to feature D4, since the additional image data is stored as moving image data without being compressed, when the additional individual image is additionally displayed on the moving image corresponding image, expansion processing of a plurality of types of moving image data can be performed at the same time. no need to do it.

Feature D5. The game machine according to feature D4, wherein data of a transparency value corresponding to semi-transparency or transparency is set in the additional image data.

According to the feature D5, the transparency value data corresponding to semi-transparency or transparency is set in the additional image data, so that the additional display of the additional individual image can be performed using the transparency value. For example, it is possible to display an effect image as an additional individual image, and it is also possible to display an image in which a predetermined portion is transparent or translucent as an additional individual image. In addition, since the additional image data having the configuration of the feature D4 and in which the transparency value data corresponding to translucent or transparent is set is stored as moving image data without being compressed, the image quality of the additional individual image is improved. It is possible to prevent deterioration.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the additional individual image corresponds to a partial image portion of the moving image corresponding image.

According to feature D6, it is possible to change the content of a part of the moving image corresponding image using the additional individual image.

Feature D7. The display control means is a color information change means for changing the color information applied to the additional image data (a function of executing the processing of step S1204 in the display CPU 72, and executing the processing of steps S1305 and steps S1403 to S1406 in the VDP 76). function).

According to the feature D7, since the color information applied to the additional image data is changed, the image data is stored compared to the configuration in which the additional image data is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of types of color information. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for

For the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D7, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F5, features G1 to G7 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. a display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P);
display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
Drawing data is created in the setting storage means (frame buffer 82) by setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame buffer 82) having a plurality of unit setting areas (unit area 121), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is generated. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit based on outputting to the display means;
with
The display control means is
When displaying a plurality of individual images (effect character CH2, effect image EG2) so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display unit, the unit in which the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display unit Regarding the set area data, the back side image data, which is the image data of the overlapping portion of the back side individual image (effect character CH2), is the front side image, which is the image data of the overlapping portion of the front side individual image (effect image EG2). Duplicate reflection means (function for executing the processes of steps S1701, S1709 and S1710 in the VDP 76) for making the data reflected;
Reflection reduction means (in the VDP 76) for reducing the reflection ratio of at least one of the foreground image data and the background image data when the background image data is reflected on the foreground image data by the duplicate reflection means. a function to execute the processing of steps S1705 to S1708;
with
When reducing the reflection ratio of one of the front side image data and the back side image data, the reflection reduction means reduces the reduction amount of one of the front side image data and the back side image data. A gaming machine characterized in that the reduction amount of the reflection ratio is varied according to the content of the reference image data.

According to the feature E1, the foreground image data and the background image data are reflected in duplicate while reducing the ratio of reflection of the reduction target image data. As a result, for example, when the images cannot be displayed satisfactorily if the image data on the front side and the image data on the back side are reflected in duplicate as they are, the reflection rate of at least one of the image data is reduced, and the image data that is reflected in duplicate is reduced. Good display is possible.

In this case, the reduction amount of the reflection rate of the reduction target image data is changed according to the content of the reduction amount reference image data. This makes it possible to reduce the reduction target image data in a manner corresponding to the content of the reduction amount reference image data, compared to a configuration in which the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data is uniformly reduced. When it is performed, fine adjustments can be made to further enhance the display effect.

As described above, display control can be preferably performed.

In addition, specifically, as a configuration of the overlap reflection means, "the image data has a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information defining color information, and the overlap reflection means is arithmetic processing execution means for executing a predetermined arithmetic processing using numerical information of each unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images; and a setting process execution means for setting unit setting areas corresponding to the unit image data that overlap each other in the means", and as a more specific configuration, "each unit setting area is , the numerical value information can be set within the range up to the limit numerical value, and the display control means displays a brighter color in the dot corresponding to the unit setting area as the numerical value is set as the numerical value information. and the arithmetic processing executing means performs, as the predetermined arithmetic processing, addition processing for adding numerical information of unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images. "execute" can be mentioned.

Feature E2. The image data has a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information defining color information,
The unit setting area is configured so that numerical information can be set within the range up to the limit numerical value,
The display control means is configured to output the image signal such that the larger the numerical value is set as the numerical information, the brighter the dot of the display section corresponding to the unit setting area is displayed,
The reflection reduction means is configured such that the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data of the reduction amount reference image data of which the numerical information is relatively large is the reduction of which the numerical information is relatively small. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the reduction amount of the reflection ratio is made larger than the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data of the amount reference image data.

According to the characteristic E2, since the dot corresponding to the unit setting area in which the numerical information of the larger numerical value is set is displayed in a brighter color, the complexity of the display control of the dot can be suppressed. In this case, the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data of the reduction amount reference image data having relatively large numerical information is the unit image of the reduction amount reference image data having relatively small numerical information. The amount of reduction in the reflection ratio is greater than that of the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the data. As a result, if the image data of each individual image is repeatedly reflected, the reduction amount of the reflection ratio is increased in order not to reach the limit value of the unit setting area for the part that may reach the limit value. , it is possible to reduce the reduction amount of the reflection rate by prioritizing overlapping reflection of the content of the image data of each individual image for a portion where there is no possibility of reaching the limit numerical value.

Feature E3. The image data has a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information defining color information,
The reflection reduction means reduces the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data by the reduction amount of the reflection ratio according to each of the numerical information of the unit image data included in the reduction amount reference image data. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2.

According to feature E3, since it is possible to adjust the reduction amount of the reflection ratio for each unit of image data, it is possible to finely adjust the portion where priority is given to reduction of the reflection ratio and the portion where priority is given to overlapping reflection. It becomes possible.

Feature E4. The unit setting area is configured so that numerical information can be set within the range up to the limit numerical value,
The image data has a plurality of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information within the range up to the limit numerical value,
The reflection reduction means sets a value obtained by dividing a value obtained by subtracting the color information of the unit image data included in the reduction amount reference image data from the limit numerical value by the limit numerical value to the unit image data. According to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit setting area to be reduced is reduced, thereby reducing the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data. game machine.

According to the feature E4, it is possible to reduce the reflection rate according to the content of the reduction amount reference image data by using each image data itself that is the target of overlapping reflection. Therefore, while suppressing the data capacity for pre-storing various data, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

Feature E5. The reduction target image data whose reflection ratio is reduced using the reduction amount reference image data is image data on a side different from the reduction target image data, out of the front side image data and the back side image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that

According to the feature E5, it is possible to reduce the reflection rate of the image data according to the content of the image data on the other side of the duplicate reflection.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the reduction amount reference image data is the front side image data, and the reduction target image data is the back side image data.

According to the feature E6, compared to a configuration in which the reflection ratio of the back side image data is uniformly reduced, it is possible to reflect the back side image data in a manner corresponding to the content of the front side individual image, and the image data overlaps. When reflecting, it is possible to make fine adjustments to further enhance the display effect.

For the configuration of any one of features E1 to E6, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F5, features G1 to G7 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Layout means for arranging object data, which is 3D information, in the virtual 3D space (function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in the VDP 135); ), projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating generation data (rendering data) based on the projection data projected onto the projection plane. Rendering setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S2310 to S2312 in the VDP 135) and data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151 and rendering unit 152) that stores generated data generated by data storage means (frame buffer 142);
Display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display portion (display surface P) of the display means (symbol display device 41);
In a game machine equipped with
The gaming machine, wherein the data generating means comprises transparency value setting means (function for executing the processing of step S3815 in the VDP 135) for setting a transparency value corresponding to semi-transparency for the projection data.

According to the feature F1, since the transparency value corresponding to translucency is set after the projection data is created, it is possible to finally display a translucent image without making the object data translucent. It becomes possible. If you create projection data after making the object data semi-transparent, there is a possibility that the back side image part that you do not want to display as object data will be displayed. Processing may become complicated. On the other hand, since it is possible to finally display a semi-transparent image without setting the object data to a semi-transparent state, it is possible to suitably perform the semi-transparent image display. Therefore, display control can be preferably performed.

Feature F2. The data generation means converts the object data for displaying the individual images (symbol display parts CH16 to CH18) for which the transparency value corresponding to the translucency is set by the transparency value setting means into the semitransparency. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein no corresponding transparency value is set.

According to the feature F2, since the object data is not translucent, it is possible to prevent the back side image portion, which is originally not desired to be displayed as the object data, from being displayed. Since the configuration of feature F1 is provided and the transparency value corresponding to translucency is set for the projection data, translucent image display can be performed while avoiding the above-described inconvenience. becomes possible.

Feature F3. The data generation means is
When displaying a plurality of individual images (drawing character CH15, pattern display portions CH16 to CH18), predetermined projection data corresponding to a part of the plurality of individual images is created, Individual creation means for creating the specific projection data corresponding to the individual images that are not included in the predetermined projection data among the individual images (steps S3802, S3803, S3805, S3806, S3808, S3809, and S3811 in the VDP 135 and a function to execute the process of step S3812);
generation execution means (function for executing the process of step S3816 in the VDP 135) for setting the predetermined projection data in a manner corresponding to the transparency value in the storage area in which the specific projection data is set;
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F3, the projection data are created a plurality of times, and a plurality of pieces of projection data are synthesized while setting a transparency value corresponding to semi-transparency for a part of the projection data. It is possible to display the images so as to overlap each other in the depth direction of the display unit, and to reflect the content of the overlapped portion of the back side individual image on the overlapped portion of the front side individual image.

Feature F4. The individual creation means is
Data creation means (processes in steps S3802, S3805, S3808 and S3811 in the VDP 135) for sequentially creating each projection data including the predetermined projection data and the specific projection data in the projection data storage means (rendering buffer BF1). function) and
A means for writing the projection data created in the projection data storage means to the storage storage means (first to fourth storage buffers BF2 to BF5) (executing the processing of steps S3803, S3806, S3809 and S3812 in the VDP 135). function) and
The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F4, in a configuration in which generated data is generated by synthesizing a plurality of projection data after generating a plurality of projection data, storage means for generating projection data can be integrated into the projection data storage means. becomes. As a result, there is no need to change the destination storage means when creating projection data, so the process design can be facilitated. Further, since the projection data storage means is provided with a storage means for storing the created projection data, it is possible to separately store the created projection data until the execution of synthesis.

Feature F5. The individual creation means creates each projection data including the predetermined projection data and the specific projection data in projection data storage means (rendering buffer BF1),
The projection data storage means has a plurality of projection unit storage areas,
Each projection unit storage area has a configuration in which color information and transparency value information can be set,
The individual creation means creates the predetermined projection data after setting transparency value information corresponding to transparency as transparency value information in each projection unit storage area in the projection data storage means, and displays the predetermined projection data. Transparency value information corresponding to opacity is set as transparency value information in the projection unit storage area in which data corresponding to the target individual image is written. A gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, characterized in that the corresponding transparency value information is maintained.

According to the feature F5, the projection data is created in the projection data storage means after the transparency value information corresponding to transparency is set in each projection unit area in the projection data storage means. , the transparency value information of the portion where the individual image is not drawn can be rendered transparent without performing post-processing after the creation of the projection data. As a result, even in a configuration in which generated data is generated by simply superimposing a plurality of projection data, the data portion of the individual image to be projected in each projection data is overwritten with the blank data portion. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

For the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F5, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F5, features G1 to G7 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P);
display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
with
The display storage means stores first predetermined image data (normal effect image data ED5) as image data for displaying a predetermined image (increase effect image EG6), and second predetermined image data (simple effect image data ED6) with a low resolution is stored,
The display control means enlarges the second predetermined image data so that even when the second predetermined image data is used, the predetermined image is displayed in the same size as when the first predetermined image data is used. A game machine characterized by comprising an image enlarging means (a function of executing the processing of step S2109 in the VDP 76).

According to the feature G1, not only the first predetermined image data but also the second predetermined image data whose resolution is set lower than that of the first predetermined image data are stored as the image data for displaying the predetermined image. When using the second predetermined image data, the second predetermined image data is enlarged and used so that the predetermined image is displayed in the same size as when the first predetermined image data is used. As a result, the first predetermined image data is used when displaying a predetermined image with high image quality, and the second predetermined image data is used when it is necessary to shorten the time required to read the image data even if the image quality is degraded. Predetermined image data can be used. Therefore, it is possible to perform data setting for displaying the predetermined image in a manner according to the situation, and it is possible to perform display control appropriately.

Feature G2. The time required for enlarging the second predetermined image data in the image enlarging means is greater than the difference between the processing time required for reading the first predetermined image data and the processing time required for reading the second predetermined image data. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the processing time is shorter.

According to feature G2, the processing time required to read out the second predetermined image data and use it after enlarging it can be made shorter than the processing time required to read out and use the first predetermined image data. Thus, by intentionally using the second predetermined image data in a situation in which the processing load is heavy, it is possible to display the predetermined image even in a situation in which the processing load is heavy.

Feature G3. The image enlarging means stores the enlarged image data obtained by enlarging the second predetermined image data in a predetermined storage means (development buffer 81),
Characteristic G1, wherein the display control means uses the enlarged image data stored in the predetermined storage means during a period in which the predetermined image is displayed using the second predetermined image data; or A gaming machine described in G2.

According to feature G3, after the second predetermined image data is enlarged, the enlarged image data is stored and held in the predetermined storage means. It becomes possible to reduce the load.

Feature G4. The display control means uses, as image data for displaying the predetermined image, the first predetermined image data from a state in which the image data after being enlarged by the image enlarging means of the second predetermined image data is used. Any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that use target setting means for switching to a state to be used (a function of executing the processing of steps S2015 to S2020 in the display CPU 72, a function of executing the processing of step S2111 in the VDP 76) is provided. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to feature G4, it is possible to switch from using the second predetermined image data to reduce the processing load to using the first predetermined image data to improve image quality while continuing to display the predetermined image. becomes.

Feature G5. When the display of the predetermined image is started at the timing when the number of individual images displayed on the display unit increases, the use target setting means selects the enlarged image data as image data for displaying the predetermined image. is used, and thereafter the image data for displaying the predetermined image is switched to the first predetermined image data.

According to feature G5, when the display of a predetermined image is to be started at the timing when the number of individual images increases, the time required to read the image data at that timing may locally increase. By displaying the predetermined image using the enlarged image data obtained by enlarging the second predetermined image data at the timing, it is possible to suppress the lengthening of the time required for the reading. On the other hand, by using the first predetermined image data after the timing, it is possible to improve the image quality of the predetermined image by reading the first predetermined image data in a situation where there is enough time to read the image data. becomes.

Feature G6. When displaying the predetermined image using the first predetermined image data, the display control means changes a display mode of the predetermined image by using different first predetermined image data at a plurality of update timings, and The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein when the predetermined image is displayed using the second predetermined image data, the display mode of the predetermined image is not changed.

According to feature G6, when the predetermined image is displayed using the first predetermined image data, it is possible to prevent the display contents from becoming uniform by changing the display mode of the predetermined image. When the predetermined image is displayed using the second predetermined image data, priority can be given to reducing the processing load.

Feature G7. A plurality of the first predetermined image data are provided so that the display mode of the predetermined image can be changed over a plurality of update timings, and only one second predetermined image data is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features G1 to G6.

According to the characteristic G7, since a plurality of first predetermined image data are provided, the display mode of the predetermined image can be changed, while only one second predetermined image data is provided. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration when displaying the predetermined image using the predetermined image data.

For the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G7, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F5, features G1 to G7 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P);
An image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generating means (the display CPU 131, the geometry calculation unit 151, and the rendering unit 152), and the content of the image is updated when the update timing comes. Display control means (VDP 135);
with
The data generation means is configured to generate a plurality of individual images including a first specific individual image (A character for loop effect CH8) and a second specific individual image (B character for loop effect CH9) on the display unit. in starting execution of information derivation processing (interpolation display period processing) to derive first display information (coordinate data) necessary for changing the display mode of the first specific individual image; Derivation processing execution means (function for executing interpolation display period processing in the display CPU 131) for starting execution of the information derivation processing to derive the second display information necessary for changing the display mode of the individual image;
The derivation process executing means derives the predetermined display information, which is one of the first display information and the second display information, when the period from one update timing to the next update timing is set as the specific period. starting the execution of the information derivation process in a predetermined specific period, and performing the information derivation process for deriving the other specific display information of the first display information and the second display information in the predetermined period A gaming machine characterized in that the game is started during the specified period after the specified period.

According to the feature H1, in a situation where a plurality of individual images including the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image are displayed on the display unit, the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is When changing, the start of deriving the first display information necessary for changing the display mode and the start of deriving the second display information are performed in different specific periods. As a result, compared to the configuration in which the derivation of the first display information and the derivation of the second display information are started in the same specific period, an event that the processing load becomes extremely high in one specific period does not occur. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to suitably change the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image, and it is possible to suitably perform display control.

Feature H2. The game according to feature H1, wherein the derivation process executing means starts execution of the information derivation process for deriving the specific display information in the specific period following the predetermined specific period. machine.

According to feature H2, an event occurs in which the processing load becomes extremely high in one specific period while minimizing the lag between the derivation start timing of the first display information and the derivation start timing of the second display information. It is possible to avoid it.

Feature H3. The display control means, when execution of the information derivation process for deriving the predetermined display information is started, even if execution of the information derivation process for deriving the specific display information is not started, The game according to feature H1 or H2, characterized in that the display using the predetermined display information is started on the side of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image that is to be used for the predetermined display information. machine.

According to the characteristic H3, even if the derivation start timing of the first display information and the derivation start timing of the second display information are intentionally shifted, the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image changes can be started early.

Feature H4. The display control means causes the first specific individual image to display the first specific action display (the first loop effect mode of the loop effect A character CH8) followed by the first specific action display (interpolation display of the loop effect A character CH8). period mode), and the second specific individual image displays the second predetermined action display (the first loop effect mode of the loop effect B character CH9) followed by the second specific action display (the loop effect B character CH9 update the content of the image so as to perform interpolation display period mode),
Features H1 to H3, wherein the first display information is information for causing the first specific action display, and the second display information is information for causing the second specific action display. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature H4, even if the start timing of the specific action display of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is shifted by shifting the specific period for starting derivation of each display information, the first specific individual image and Since each of the second specific individual images is configured to perform the specific action display following the predetermined action display, it is possible for the player to recognize that the content of the deviation is also the content of the series of action displays. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the processing load while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature H5. An operation mode of the first specific individual image and an operation mode of the second specific individual image are different at a timing of starting execution of the information deriving process for deriving the predetermined display information. The gaming machine according to feature H4.

According to the feature H5, even if the start timing of the specific action display of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is shifted by shifting the specific period for starting derivation of each display information, the information derivation process can be executed. Since the operation mode of the first specific individual image and the operation mode of the second specific individual image are different at the start timing, the difference in the operation modes makes the difference in the start timing less noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to disperse the processing load while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature H6. The action mode of the first specific individual image at the timing when the first predetermined action display ends is a predetermined mode, and the action mode of the second specific individual image at the timing when the second predetermined action display ends is a predetermined aspect,
The gaming machine according to feature H4 or H5, wherein the predetermined display information is the first display information, and the specific display information is the second display information.

According to feature H6, it is determined in advance from which of the first display information and the second display information the information derivation process is started, so that the target for starting the information derivation process first can be changed according to the situation. The processing configuration can be simplified in that there is no need to Further, since the action mode of each specific individual image at the timing when the predetermined action display ends is determined, which of the first display information and the second display information the information derivation process is to be started is determined in advance. Even so, it is possible to prevent the player viewing the display content from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature H7. Based on the occurrence of a switching opportunity that occurs irregularly in a situation where the first specific individual image performs the first predetermined action display and the second specific individual image performs the second predetermined action display. A configuration in which a first specific action display and the second specific action display are started,
The derivation process execution means is a first start determination means (display A gaming machine according to feature H4 or H5, characterized by comprising a function of executing the process of step S2702 in the CPU 131.

According to the characteristic H7, since the situation in which the predetermined action is displayed is switched to the situation in which the specific action is displayed is triggered irregularly, it is possible to diversify the display contents. In this case, since it is determined from which of the first display information and the second display information the information derivation process is to be started according to the timing at which the switching opportunity occurs, the information is specified in an order in which it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. It becomes possible to start the operation display.

Feature H8. The data generation means is
Means (step in display CPU 131) for deriving information for causing the first specific individual image to display the first predetermined action according to prestored first predetermined action information (first animation data AD1 for character A) a function to execute the processing of S2407);
A first special action display (second loop effect mode of A character CH8 for loop effect) is performed on the first specific individual image in accordance with prestored first special action information (second animation data AD2 for character A). a means for deriving information for making the
Means (step in display CPU 131) for deriving information for causing said second specific individual image to display said second predetermined action according to pre-stored second predetermined action information (first animation data AD3 for character B) a function to execute the processing of S2407);
A second special action display (second loop effect mode of B character CH9 for loop effect) is performed on the second specific individual image in accordance with prestored second special action information (second animation data AD4 for B character). a means for deriving information for making the
with
the first specific action display is performed after the first predetermined action display is performed and before the first special action display is performed;
the second specific action display is performed after the second predetermined action display is performed and before the second special action display is performed;
The derivation process executing means derives the first display information by executing the information derivation process using the first predetermined action information and the first special action information, and derives the first display information and the second predetermined action information. The gaming machine according to any one of features H4 to H7, wherein the second display information is derived by executing the information deriving process using the second special action information.

According to feature H8, between each predetermined action display and each special action display, a specific action display is performed based on information derived using pre-stored predetermined action information and special action information. It is possible to smoothly change display contents from a state in which a predetermined action is displayed to a state in which a special action is displayed, while suppressing the amount of information required to store information in advance. However, if the process of deriving the display information using the predetermined action information and the special action information is performed collectively in one specific period, the processing load may become extremely large, but this is described in feature H1. With this configuration, the derivation of the display information is started in different specific periods for the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image, so it is possible to distribute the processing load.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H8, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F5, features G1 to G7 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. a display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (display surface P);
Display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display section using generated data (drawing data) generated by data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation section 151 and rendering section 152);
with
The data generating means reads and uses color defining image data (background texture data GTD1) having a plurality of unit data associated with numerical information defining color information from the display storage means (memory module 133). A configuration for generating the generated data by
The display storage means pre-stores adjustment data (first refraction texture data GTD2, second refraction texture data GTD3) having a plurality of unit data in the same manner as the color defining image data,
The data generation means utilizes numerical information derived from the unit data of the adjustment data as predetermined adjustment information different from color information to generate corresponding individual images displayed using the color defining image data. A gaming machine characterized by comprising content adjustment means for adjusting display content (function for executing the processing of steps S4103 to S4107 in the VDP 135).

According to feature I1, the display content of the corresponding individual image is adjusted by using the predetermined adjustment information, so it is possible to diversify the display content while using the same color defining image data. In this case, the predetermined adjustment information is derived using adjustment data having a plurality of unit data, like the color-specifying image data. As a result, it is possible to adjust the display contents of the corresponding individual image using the adjustment data stored in the display storage means as data similar to the color-specifying image data. Compared to the configuration in which adjustment data is prepared as different data, it is possible to adjust the display content of the corresponding individual image while sharing the processing content for reading the data and the processing content for temporarily storing after reading. . Therefore, display control can be preferably performed.

Feature I2. The unit data has a plurality of base color correspondence data (R value, G value, B value) corresponding to the base color,
The content adjustment means specifies the predetermined adjustment information using numerical information derived from a plurality of base color correspondence data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. The game machine described.

According to feature I2, by deriving the predetermined adjustment information using a plurality of base color correspondence information set in the unit data of the adjustment data, it is possible to finely control the content of the predetermined adjustment information. .

Feature I3. The unit data has a plurality of base color correspondence data (R value, G value, B value) corresponding to the base color,
The content adjustment means specifies the predetermined adjustment information using numerical information derived from a part of the plurality of base color correspondence data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. The gaming machine according to characterizing feature I1 or I2.

According to feature I3, all of the base color correspondence data is used by deriving the predetermined adjustment information using a part of the plurality of base color correspondence data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. It is possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the predetermined adjustment information compared to the configuration in which the predetermined adjustment information is derived by

Feature I4. The data generation means is
Arranging means for arranging object data, which is three-dimensional information, in a virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in the VDP 135);
viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of step S2306 in the VDP 135);
Rendering setting means for projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating generated data based on the data projected onto the projection plane (executing steps S2310 to S2312 in VDP 135) function) and
has
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the color defining image data is texture data set for the object data.

According to feature I4, it is possible to derive predetermined adjustment information using adjustment data prepared as texture data.

Feature I5. The game according to feature I4, wherein the content adjustment means adjusts the content of the unit data in the texture data rather than adjusting the content of the object data by using the predetermined adjustment information. machine.

According to the feature I5, the content of the unit data in the texture data is adjusted instead of adjusting the content of the object data using the predetermined adjustment information. information, and the processing load for making adjustments can be reduced.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the content adjustment means adjusts the content of the texture data using the predetermined adjustment information before setting the texture data in the object data.

According to feature I6, it is possible to perform adjustment using the predetermined adjustment information without being affected by the data state after the texture data is set to the object data, so that the adjustment can be easily performed.

Feature I7. According to any one of features I1 to I6, wherein the content adjustment means uses the predetermined adjustment information to display a distortion of the corresponding individual image displayed using the color defining image data. The game machine described.

According to the feature I7, it is possible to perform distortion display of the corresponding individual image by using the adjustment data stored in the display storage means as data similar to the color defining image data.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features I1 to I7, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Layout means for arranging object data, which is 3D information, in the virtual 3D space (function for executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in the VDP 135); ), projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generating generation data (rendering data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane. Drawing setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2310 to S2312 in the VDP 135); generated data storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing generated data generated by the data generation means;
Display control means (VDP 135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on display means (symbol display device 41);
In a game machine equipped with
The data generating means does not adjust the contents of the object data (background plate-shaped object data GSD) based on the predetermined adjustment information, but rather texture data (background texture data GTD1) set for the object data. is adjusted based on the predetermined adjustment information to adjust the display contents of the corresponding individual image displayed using the object data and the texture data (executing steps S4103 to S4107 in the VDP 135). A game machine characterized by having a function to play.

According to the feature J1, the content of the object data is not adjusted using the predetermined adjustment information, but the content of the unit data in the texture data is adjusted. information, and the processing load for making adjustments can be reduced. Therefore, display control can be preferably performed.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the content adjustment means adjusts the content of the texture data using the predetermined adjustment information before setting the texture data in the object data.

According to the feature J2, since it is possible to perform adjustment using the predetermined adjustment information without being affected by the data state after texture data is set as object data, it becomes easier to perform the adjustment.

In addition, for the configuration of any one of the features J1 to J2, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F5, features G1 to G7 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the above feature group A to feature group J can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. A first control means (sound and light side MPU 62) that determines the execution content of the production,
Second control means (display CPU 72) for controlling effect execution means (symbol display device 41) based on transmission information transmitted by the first control means;
with
When a predetermined execution opportunity occurs, the production execution means executes an opportunity corresponding production (announcement display),
The opportunity response effect has a plurality of effect elements (second type of content) in which at least one of execution/non-execution and content varies,
A configuration in which the execution pattern of the opportunity response effect is different depending on the combination pattern of the variable content of the plurality of effect elements,
When transmitting the transmission information for executing the opportunity corresponding production, the first control means transmits corresponding transmission information (first command data CD1, second command data CD2 , third command data CD3) and the corresponding transmission information (first command data CD1, second command data CD2, third command data CD3) corresponding to the variable contents of other effect elements, and information to be transmitted separately. A game machine characterized by comprising transmission means (a function for executing command selection processing in the sound and light side MPU 62).

According to the feature K1, since the execution pattern of the opportunity-responsive presentation differs depending on the combination pattern of the variation target contents of the plurality of presentation elements, it is possible to diversify the presentation contents of the opportunity-based presentation. In this case, since the first corresponding transmission information corresponding to the variation target content of the predetermined effect element and the second corresponding transmission information corresponding to the variation target content of the other effect element are separately transmitted, Even when increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements, or when changing the contents to be changed, it is only necessary to change the corresponding transmission information for each corresponding effect element, so the design of the transmission information can be facilitated. .

Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein each of the predetermined effect element and the other effect element determines the contents of effects to be executed simultaneously.

According to feature K2, even if there are a plurality of effect elements that determine the effect contents to be executed at the same time, the corresponding transmission information for causing the second control means to specify the change target contents of these effect elements is provided for each type of effect element. , it is possible to facilitate the design of the transmission information.

Feature K3. The first control means is an end transmission means (step S509 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that transmits end transmission information (end command) indicating that all of the corresponding transmission information necessary for executing the opportunity response effect has been transmitted. A gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of

According to feature K3, in the configuration in which the corresponding transmission information is transmitted in units of effect elements, the end transmission information is transmitted when all of the corresponding transmission information necessary for executing the opportunity-response effect is transmitted. , it is possible to make the second control means recognize that transmission of all correspondence transmission information necessary for executing the opportunity response performance is completed without fixing the number of performance elements included in the opportunity response performance. Become.

Feature K4. The second control means is
storage execution means (function for executing command interrupt processing in display CPU 72) for storing the received corresponding transmission information in information storage means (command storage buffer 101);
Reference information for setting reference information (execution target table) used for executing the trigger corresponding effect corresponding to the plurality of corresponding transmission information stored in the information storage means when the end transmission information is received. setting means (function for executing command-based processing in the display CPU 72);
The gaming machine according to feature K3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature K4, the second control means is configured to set the reference information used for executing the opportunity-responsive production after receiving all the corresponding transmission information necessary for executing the opportunity-responsive production. Instead of setting reference information corresponding to each of the variable contents of the effect elements, it is possible to set one reference information corresponding to all the variable contents of all the effect elements.

Feature K5. The corresponding transmission information includes outline information (first command data CD1) for specifying outline contents of the effect element corresponding to the corresponding transmission information, and branch contents included in outline contents corresponding to the outline information. and branch information (second command data CD2, third command data CD3) for specifying which of them is to be executed.

According to the feature K5, even one piece of correspondence transmission information is divided into outline information and branch information, so that the design of one piece of correspondence transmission information is also facilitated.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the second control means grasps different contents from the branch information depending on the contents of the outline information even if the contents of the branch information are the same.

According to the feature K6, since the branch information is commonly used among a plurality of corresponding transmission information, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for pre-storing the transmission correspondence information.

For the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K6, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F5, features G1 to G7 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the above characteristic group K can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which a command transmitted from one control means is used and control corresponding to the command is executed by another control means.

For example, in a pachinko machine, a configuration in which execution control of performance is performed by a control means for performance based on a command transmitted from a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, or a control means for one performance is transmitted from a control means for performance. A configuration is known in which performance execution control is performed by another control means for performance based on the command.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to optimize the configuration of transmission information transmitted from one control means to another control means in order to execute an effect. There is room for improvement.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. Calculation execution means (function for executing task processing in the display CPU 72) that starts calculation processing using calculation information (execution target table) when a start trigger occurs;
Result utilization means (function for executing the processing of step S609 in the display CPU 72, VDP 76) for executing specific processing using the calculation result of the arithmetic processing;
with
When the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing in a predetermined execution time and the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, the arithmetic execution means performs the predetermined re-execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S606, S610 and S916 in the display CPU 72) for executing the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information set as the utilization target in the execution time; A game machine characterized by

According to the characteristic L1, when the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing, the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle. Therefore, the processing time of the arithmetic processing varies and the execution of other processing is greatly restricted It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the Further, when the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information used in the arithmetic processing terminated in the middle is executed again in the arithmetic processing of the next execution. This makes it possible to complete the execution of the arithmetic processing using each piece of information for arithmetic operation even if the arithmetic processing can be terminated in the middle.

Feature L2. The game according to feature L1, wherein the re-executing means restarts the arithmetic processing from the contents in the middle of the execution in the execution round next to the predetermined execution round. machine.

According to the feature L2, when the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information that was used in the previous execution is re-executed, the arithmetic processing is resumed from the contents in the middle of the last execution. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required to complete the arithmetic processing resumed in the new execution cycle.

Feature L3. The arithmetic processing includes a plurality of types of individual arithmetic processing (step S902, step S903, step S906, step S909, step S912 to step S914), and the plurality of types of individual arithmetic processing are sequentially executed in each execution of the arithmetic processing. The target configuration is
The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the arithmetic execution means terminates the current arithmetic processing after the end of the individual arithmetic processing even if the condition for terminating the individual arithmetic processing is satisfied during execution of the individual arithmetic processing. .

According to the feature L3, even if the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, the individual arithmetic processing is not terminated in the middle. can be suppressed.

Feature L4. The arithmetic processing is periodically executed as a part of periodic processing (V interrupt processing) in which execution conditions are satisfied,
The game according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the arithmetic execution means terminates the arithmetic processing in the middle of the arithmetic processing when the execution condition is met as the end condition during the arithmetic processing. machine.

According to feature L4, it is possible to complete the execution of arithmetic processing using each piece of arithmetic information while ensuring regular execution of periodic processing.

Feature L5. Even if the arithmetic processing is terminated midway in the predetermined execution times, the arithmetic execution means, when a priority event (set of an execution target table for notification) has occurred, In the execution time following the execution time, the calculation is performed using the calculation information corresponding to the priority event, instead of using the calculation information set to be used in the predetermined execution time. The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized by executing processing.

According to the feature L5, since the execution of the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information corresponding to the priority event is prioritized over the resuming of the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information in the arithmetic processing terminated in the middle, the priority event It is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described without delaying the execution of the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information corresponding to .

Feature L6. The specific control means having the arithmetic execution means is a re-execution correspondence transmission means (display A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S611 in the CPU 72.

According to the feature L6, when the arithmetic processing in a predetermined execution cycle is terminated in the middle and the arithmetic processing is executed again in the next execution cycle, the re-execution correspondence information is transmitted. It is possible to make other operations correspond to the re-execution of the arithmetic processing.

Feature L7. A predetermined control means (sound and light side MPU 62) is provided separately from the specific control means,
The predetermined control means is characterized in that it comprises a process adjusting means (function for executing the display side command corresponding process in the sound and light side MPU 62) for adjusting the execution contents of the predetermined process when the re-execution corresponding information is received. The game machine according to feature L6.

According to the characteristic L7, when the arithmetic processing is re-executed, the execution content of the predetermined processing in the predetermined control means is adjusted, so that the processing content of the specific processing and the processing content of the predetermined processing can be made to correspond. becomes.

Feature L8. The result utilization means uses the calculation result of the calculation process as the specific process to control the execution of the specific effect execution means (symbol display device 41),
The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein the predetermined control means performs execution control of an effect in a predetermined effect execution means (the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45) as the predetermined process.

According to the feature L8, when the derivation of the calculation result is delayed in the arithmetic processing executed to control the execution of the production by the specific production execution means, the predetermined production execution means executes to control the execution of the production. Since the processing content of the predetermined processing to be performed is also adjusted, it is possible to make the content of the effects in each effect executing means correspond to each other.

Feature L9. When the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing in the predetermined execution time and the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, the result utilization means performs the arithmetic operation in the execution time before the predetermined execution time. The game machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, characterized in that the specific processing is executed using the calculation result of the processing.

According to the characteristic L9, when the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, the specific processing is not executed using the content of the arithmetic processing in the middle, but the arithmetic result of the arithmetic processing completed before it is executed. is used to execute the specific process, it is possible to prevent the execution content of the specific process from becoming abnormal.

For the configuration of any one of the features L1 to L9, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F5, features G1 to G7 , features H1 to H8, features I1 to I7, features J1 to J2, features K1 to K6, and features L1 to L9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention having the characteristic group L can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. These gaming machines are provided with control means in which a CPU and an element such as a memory storing a control program are mounted, and a game is played through the execution of arithmetic processing in the control means. Controls are in place to make this possible. Note that there is also known a configuration in which the CPU and memory are not individually mounted in the control means, but are mounted in the control means in an integrated state.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration that enables the control means to suitably execute arithmetic processing, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 41... Symbol display device, 44... Display light emitting part, 45... Speaker part, 62... Sound and light side MPU, 72... Display CPU, 74... Memory module, 76... VDP, 81... Expansion buffer, 82 Frame buffer 93 Video decoder 101 Command storage buffer 121 Unit area 122 Pixel 131 Display CPU 133 Memory module 135 VDP 142 Frame buffer 151 Geometry calculator 152 Rendering unit 169 Coordinate calculation area ABD1 to ABD50 Bone data AD1 to AD4 Animation data BF1 Drawing buffer BF2 to BF5 Saving buffer BG Ground image BGD Ground object data , BMD... Base video data, BOD1 to BOD50... Bone data, BSD... Plain object data for plane shadow, BST1... Texture data for first plane shadow, BST2... Texture data for second plane shadow, BTD1... Texture data, BTD2 ... texture data for assembly, CD1 to CD3 ... command data, CH1 ... character for color change production, CH2 ... character for effect production, CH8 ... A character for loop production, CH9 ... B character for loop production, CH10 ... character for bone display. , CH11...Character for production, CH12...Shadow image, CH13...Character for production, CH14...Shadow image, CH15...Character for production, CH16 to CH18...Design display part, CHG1 to CHG5...Collective unit character, CR...Target of color change Area ED5... Image data for normal effect ED6... Image data for simple effect EG2... Effect image EG6... Effect image for increase FRD1... Skeleton data FRD2... Skeleton data for assembly GSD... Plate-shaped object for background Data GTD1: Background texture data GTD2, GTD3: Refraction texture data P: Display surface PD1 to PD3: Parts image data SG: Stairs image SGD: Stairs object data SKD1: Skin data SKD2: Collective skin data, SSD: Plate-shaped object data for step shadows.

Claims (1)

calculation execution means for starting calculation processing using calculation information when a start trigger occurs;
a result utilization means for executing a specific process using a calculation result of the calculation process;
with
When a termination condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing in a predetermined execution time and the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, the arithmetic execution means performs the predetermined comprising a re-executing means for resuming the arithmetic processing from the content in the middle of the execution of
When the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing in the predetermined execution time and the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, the result utilization means performs the arithmetic operation in the execution time before the predetermined execution time. A configuration for executing the specific process using the calculation result of the process,
A game characterized in that the specific control means having the arithmetic execution means comprises means for transmitting re-execution correspondence information when the re-execution of the arithmetic processing by the re-execution means is set. machine.

Images